Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Reference Vol.1
IM 33K03E22-50E
IM 33K03E22-50E
5th Edition
Introduction
The integrated production control system CENTUM VP is the products of distributed control
system (DCS) for large and medium-small scale process control.
This manual is written for use as a part of reference manual describing the functional details
of CENTUM VP. This manual focuses on the function block details. You can read the required
chapters when you need the details of function blocks.
In this manual, FFCS, FFCS-L and FFCS-V are all referred to as FFCS series. If the individual
types of FCS need to be particularly mentioned, the FCSs may be described respectively with
their particular types.
This manual consists of the following chapters:
IM 33K03E22-50E
ii
License
Management
IM 33K01C20-50E
CENTUM VP
Security Guide
IM 33K01C30-50E
Function Blocks
Overview
Function Blocks
Reference Vol.1
Function Blocks
Reference Vol.2
IM 33K03E10-50E
IM 33K03E21-50E
IM 33K03E22-50E
IM 33K03E23-50E
Function Blocks
Reference Vol. 3
Human Interface
Stations Reference Vol. 1
Human Interface
Stations Reference Vol. 2
Engineering
Reference Vol. 1
IM 33K03E24-50E
IM 33K03F21-50E
IM 33K03F22-50E
IM 33K03G21-50E
Engineering
Reference Vol. 2
Engineering
Reference Vol. 3
Batch Management
System Reference
IM 33K03G22-50E
IM 33K03G23-50E
Consolidated Alarm
Management Software
Reference
IM 33K03H20-50E
SEBOL
Reference
Communication with
Subsystems Using RIO
Communication with
Subsystems Using FIO
Communication
Devices Reference
IM 33K03K10-50E
IM 33K03L10-50E
IM 33K03L20-50E
IM 33K03M10-50E
Optional Functions
Reference
Communication with
PROFIBUS Systems
Compliance with
FDA: 21CFR Part 11
Generic Subsystem
Gateway Reference
IM 33K03N10-50E
IM 33K03P10-50E
IM 33K03Q10-50E
IM 33K03R10-50E
System Integration
OPC Station Reference
Unified Gateway
Station Reference
Vnet/IP
Engineering Test
Guide
IM 33K03R20-50E
IM 33K03R30-50E
IM 33K10A10-50E
IM 33K10H20-50E
Engineering
Tutorial
APCS
CENTUM
Data Access Library
FOUNDATION fieldbus
Reference
IM 33K02E10-50E
IM 33K15U10-50E
IM 33K15P10-50E
IM 33K20T10-50E
Engineering
IM 33K03J10-50E
FOUNDATION fieldbus
Engineering Guide
IM 33K20T20-50E
Operating Messages
IM 33K02D10-50E
IM 33K02D20-50E
Hardware
Peripherals
Turbomachinery
I/O Modules
IM 33K50C10-50E
IM 33K50E40-50E
IM 33K50G10-50E
IM 33K10U10-50E
Communication Devices
Migrated-FCS(FIO)
IM 33K50D10-50E
IM 33K55W10-50E
IM 33K03E22-50E
iii
To protect the system controlled by the Product and the Product itself and to ensure safe
operation, please observe the safety precautions described in this Manual. Yokogawa
Electric Corporation ("YOKOGAWA") assumes no liability for safety if users fail to observe
the safety precautions and instructions when operating the Product.
If the Product is used in a manner not specified in the User's Manuals, the protection provided by the Product may be impaired.
If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the Product or for
the Product itself, please install it externally.
Use only spare parts that are approved by YOKOGAWA when replacing parts or consumables of the Product.
Do not use the Product and its accessories such as power cords on devices that are not
approved by YOKOGAWA. Do not use the Product and its accessories for any purpose
other than as intended by YOKOGAWA.
The following symbols are used in the Product and User's Manuals to indicate the accompanying safety precautions:
Indicates that caution is required for operation. This symbol is labeled on the Product to refer the user to the User's Manuals for necessary actions or behaviors in
order to protect the operator and the equipment against dangers such as electrical
shocks. In the User's Manuals, you will find the precautions necessary to prevent
physical injury or death, which may be caused by accidents, such as electrical
shocks resulting from operational mistakes.
Identifies a protective conductor terminal. Before using the Product, you must
ground the protective conductor terminal to avoid electric shock.
Identifies a functional grounding terminal. A terminal marked "FG" also has the
same function. This terminal is used for grounding other than protective grounding.
Before using the Product, you must ground this terminal.
Indicates an AC supply.
Indicates a DC supply.
Indicates the ON position of a power on/off switch.
Indicates the OFF position of a power on/off switch.
Hand over the User's Manuals to your end users so that they can keep the User's Manuals on hand for convenient reference.
Thoroughly read and understand the information in the User's Manuals before using the
Product.
For the avoidance of doubt, the purpose of the User's Manuals is not to warrant that the
Product is suitable for any particular purpose but to describe the functional details of the
Product.
Every effort has been made in the preparation of the User's Manuals to ensure the accuracy of their contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, contact
IM 33K03E22-50E
iv
us or your local distributor. The User's Manuals with incorrectly ordered pages or missing
pages will be replaced.
Except as specified in the warranty terms, YOKOGAWA shall not provide any warranty for
the Product.
YOKOGAWA shall not be liable for any indirect or consequential loss incurred by either
using or not being able to use the Product.
n Notes on Software
YOKOGAWA makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the Software Product's merchantability or suitability for any particular purpose, except as specified in the warranty terms.
Please purchase the appropriate number of licenses of the Software Product according to
the number of computers to be used.
No copy of the Software Product may be made for any purpose other than backup; otherwise, it is deemed as an infringement of YOKOGAWA's Intellectual Property rights.
No reverse engineering, reverse compiling, reverse assembling, or converting the Software Product to human-readable format may be performed for the Software Product.
No part of the Software Product may be transferred, converted, or sublet for use by any
third-party, without prior written consent from YOKOGAWA.
IM 33K03E22-50E
Documentation Conventions
n Symbol Marks
The following symbols are used throughout the User's Manuals.
Identifies instructions that must be observed to avoid physical
injury, electric shock, or death.
Identifies instructions that must be observed to prevent damages to the software or hardware, or system failures of the
Product.
Identifies important information required to understand operations or functions.
Identifies additional information.
n Typographical Conventions
The following typographical conventions are used throughout the User's Manuals.
Mark
This symbol indicates the description for an item for which you should make a setting in
the product's engineering window.
While operating an engineering window, the help information for the selected item can be
accessed from "Builder Definition Items" in the Help menu. Listing more than one definition item after this symbol implies that the paragraph on the page describes more than
one definition items.
Example:
Tag Name, Station Name
Mark
Indicates that a space must be entered between character strings.
Example:
.ALPIC010-SC
IM 33K03E22-50E
vi
Conventions Used to Show Key or Button Operations
The following conventions are used within a command syntax or program statement format:
"..." Mark
Indicates previous command or argument that may be repeated.
Example:
Imax (arg1, arg2, ...)
n Drawing Conventions
Drawings used in the User's Manuals may be partially emphasized or simplified for convenience of description, so that the unnecessary parts are omitted from the drawings.
Drawings of the window may be slightly different from the actual screen shots with different
settings or fonts; the difference is not extended to the range that may hamper the understanding of basic functionalities and operation and monitoring tasks.
IM 33K03E22-50E
vii
n Trademark Acknowledgements
CENTUM, ProSafe, Vnet/IP, PRM, Exaopc, and STARDOM are registered trademarks of
YOKOGAWA.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, and Visual Studio are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
in
SIEMENS and SIMATIC are registered trademarks of Siemens Industrial Automation Ltd.
All other company and product names mentioned in the User's Manuals are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
IM 33K03E22-50E
Blank Page
Toc-1
CONTENTS
1.
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced ThreePosition ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)......................................1-83
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.13.2
1.13.3
1.13.4
Initializer Start.............................................................................1-130
1.13.5
Auto-Startup............................................................................... 1-131
1.13.6
1.13.7
1.13.8
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
Toc-2
1.17.1
1.17.2
1.17.3
1.17.4
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.20.2
1.20.3
1.20.4
1.20.5
1.21
1.22
1.22.2
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
1.30
1.31
1.32
1.33
1.33.2
1.34
1.35
1.36
1.37
1.38
Toc-3
1.39
1.40
1.41
1.42
1.43
IM 33K03E22-50E
Blank Page
1-1
1.
Regulatory Control
The regulatory control performs control computation processing using analog process values
for process monitor and process control. The function blocks that provide the regulatory control function are referred as regulatory control blocks.
This chapter presents a detailed description of the function of each of the regulatory control
blocks, excluding the FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate block.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks, refer to:
A2, Overview of FF Faceplate Blocks in the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Reference (IM 33K20T10-50E)
Software I/O
Internal switch
Calculation blocks
Annunciator message
Sequence message
Faceplate blocks
SFC blocks
Unit instrument blocks
Options
System (*2)
Fieldbus I/O
Figure 1-1 Regulatory Control Block in the Basic Control Function Architecture
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-2
1.1
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the input processing that are common to various types of regulatory control
blocks, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about output processing that are common to various types of regulatory control blocks,
refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about alarm processing that are common to various types of regulatory control blocks,
refer to:
5, Alarm Processing - FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
BIN
RL1
RL2
TIN
CSV
RSV
IN
RAW
Input
processing
(TSW)
SV
RCAS
PV
INT
Alarm
processing
CAS
AUT
MAN
TSI
CAS
AUT
Control
computation
processing
MAN
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
(PV, PV, MV, MV)
RMV
SUB
1-3
Input Processing
Receives a signal from the input terminal and outputs a process variable (PV).
Output Processing
Reads the manipulated output value (MV) and outputs the result of control computation processing to the output terminal as an output signal.
Alarm Processing
Detects an abnormality in the process variable (PV) or manipulated output value (MV) and notifies the operation and monitoring functions.
Control computation processing can be performed independently via data setting or data reference between the function blocks, without involving input processing or output processing.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-4
1.1.1
Controller Blocks
Alarm Block
YS Blocks
Code
Name
PVI
PVI-DV
n Controller Blocks
The table below shows a list of controller blocks:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-5
Controllers
*1:
Code
Name
PID
PI-HLD
PID-BSW
ONOFF
ONOFF-E
ONOFF-G
ONOFF-GE
PID-TP
PD-MR
PI-BLEND
PID-STC
This type of function blocks can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS.
Manual Loader
*1:
Code
Name
MLD
MLD-PVI
MLD-SW
MC-2
MC-2E
MC-3
MC-3E
This type of function blocks can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-6
Signal Setters
Code
Name
RATIO
PG-L13
BSETU-2
BSETU-3
Code
VELLIM
Name
Velocity Limiter Block
Signal selectors
Code
Name
AS-H/M/L
Autoselector Block
SS-H/M/L
SS-DUAL
Code
Name
FOUT
FFSUM
XCPL
SPLIT
Signal Distributors
n Alarm Block
The table below shows the alarm block:
Table 1.1.1-8 Alarm Block
Block type
Alarm
Code
ALM-R
Name
Representative Alarm Block
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-7
Code
PTC
Name
Pulse Count Input Block
n YS Blocks
The table below shows the YS blocks:
Table 1.1.1-10 YS Blocks
Block type
YS instrument
Code
Name
SLCD
YS Controller Block
SLPC
YS Programmable Controller
Block
SLMC
YS Programmable Controller
Block with Pulse-Width Output
SMST-111
SMST-121
SMRT
SBSD
SLCC
SLBC
STLD
YS Totalizer Block
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-8
1.1.2
n Data Value
The data value is a numeric data that is transmitted in or out of a function block. The data
values handled by the blocks include process variable (PV), cascade setpoint value (CSV)
and manipulated output value (MV).
The data values handled by the regulatory control blocks are numeric data in engineering
unit. However, the data received from the input modules (excluding the input modules for temperature measurement as well as for pulse trains) and the setpoint data sent to analogue output modules are given as percentage values in the range from 0 % to 100 %.
The data value read into a function block via an input terminal is called input data, while the
value written out of a function block via an output terminal is called output data.
n Data Status
The data status is a piece of status information that indicates the value and quality of I/O data.
The data status is conveyed as I/O data from one function block to another via I/O connection
along with a data value.
The data status is used to test the existence of exceptional events, such as process failures
and computation errors occurred in the control computation processing performed by the
function blocks.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the details of data status, refer to:
6.4, Data Status in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
n Input Data
The input data is numeric data that the function blocks read from input terminals.
The types of input data are shown below:
Setpoint value (SV), cascade setpoint value (CSV), remote setpoint value (RSV)
The engineering unit and scale range of raw input signals (RAW) input to an IN terminal agree
with the engineering unit and scale range of data at the connected destination of the IN terminal. A raw input signal turns into a process variable (PV) after input processing.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the engineering unit and scale range. However,
the process variable (PV) of Motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3) must be an integer value between 0 and 2.
Engineering unit
Consists of six or less standard-width characters or three double-width characters.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-9
The default is %.
Setpoint Value (SV), Cascade Setpoint Value (CSV), Remote Setpoint Value
(RSV)
The engineering unit and scale range of the setpoint value (SV), cascade setpoint value
(CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) agree with the engineering unit and scale range of
the process variable (PV) except in the function blocks shown below:
Table 1.1.2-1 Engineering Unit Symbol and Scale Range of the Setpoint Value (SV), Cascade Setpoint
Value (CSV) and Remote Setpoint Value (RSV)
Function Blocks
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the engineering unit symbol and scale range of SV for the
function blocks shown to the left.
The engineering unit and scale range of CSV and
RSV are same as those of SV. The FOUT and
FFSUM blocks have no RSV.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-10
n Output Data
The output data is a numeric data value that is written out of a function block via an output
terminal.
The types of output data are shown below:
MV Display Style
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the display form for the manipulated output value
(MV).
MV Display Style
Select Automatic Determination or User Define.
The default is Automatic Determination.
When Automatic Determination is selected, the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV) change according to the connected destination of the OUT terminal.
If the connection destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the
manipulated output value (MV) is fixed to 0 to 100 and %, respectively. However, this
rule does not apply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block.
When outputting to a cascade setpoint value (CSV) in a case where the connection destines to a SET terminal of another function block (cascade connection), the engineering
unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV) agree with those of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) of the output destination.
When the connection destination is an input terminal of another function block than SET
terminal, self determination must be selected.
When User Define is selected, set the engineering unit and scale range for the manipulated
output value (MV). The engineering unit and the range should be the same as the output destination.
MV Range
High and low limits.
Numerical values of seven digits or less, where the sign and decimal point occupy one
digit each.
The default is 100.0 for the upper limit and 0.0 for the lower limit.
For MV displayed on an instrument faceplate, set whether to display the engineering unit data
as is or to convert the data into a percentage-unit value first. Use the Function Block Detail
Builder to set the instrument faceplate display.
MV Display on Faceplate
Select Indicate Actual Quantity or Indicate %.
The default is Indicate real amount.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-11
IMPORTANT
Event when the user wants to display the MV in percentage on HIS faceplate, there is no
need to change the setting for [MV Display Style] - [User-Define] to 0 % - 100 %. The setting
in this field should be kept the same as the output destination; but to change the setting [MV
Display on Faceplate] from [Indicate Actual Quantity] to [Indicate %].
The auxiliary output values include PV, PV, MV and MV, the types vary with the function
block. The engineering unit and scale range of the auxiliary output values change in accordance with the connected destination of the SUB terminal.
If the connected destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the
auxiliary output values are fixed to 0 to 100 and %, respectively. However, this rule
does not apply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block.
When the connected destination is a function block and auxiliary output is the process
variable (PV) or process variable change (PV), the engineering unit and scale range of
the output value agree with those of the process variable (PV).
When the connected destination is a function block and auxiliary output is the manipulated output value (MV) or manipulated output change (MV), the output value is regarded as having the same engineering unit and scale range as those of the manipulated
output value (MV).
The process variable (PV) can be output directly from the input indicator blocks.
The engineering unit and scale information of the process variable (PV) vary with the connected destination of the OUT terminal.
If the connected destination is a process I/O, the scale range and engineering unit of the
output value are fixed to 0 to 100 and %, respectively. However, this rule does not apply if the connection destination is a Fieldbus block.
If the connected destination is another function block, the scale range and engineering
unit of the output value agree with those of the process variable.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-12
1.1.3
Input signal
Digital filter (*1)
conversion (*1)
Totalizer (*1)
PV overshoot
(*1)
CAL (*1)
PVI
PVI-DV
PID
PI-HLD
PID-BSW
ONOFF
ONOFF-E
B/A/R/Pb/Sb/L
B/A/R/Pb/Sb/L
ONOFF-G
ONOFF-GE
PID-TP
PD-MR
PI-BLEND
PID-STC
MLD
MLD-PVI
MLD-SW
MC-2
MC-2E
MC-3
S2/S3/L
MC-3E
RATIO (*2)
B/A/R/Pb/Sb/L
BSETU-2
B/A/R/Pb/Sb/L
BSETU-3
B/A/C/Sb
B/A/Sb/L
PG-L13
x
VELLIM
SS-H/M/L
AS-H/M/L
SS-DUAL (*3)
FOUT
FFSUM
XCPL
SPLIT
PTC
(*4)
(*4)
x
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-13
Totalizer (*1)
PV overshoot
(*1)
SLPC
SLMC
SMST-111
SMST-121
SMRT
SBSD
(*5)
SLBC
(*5)
SLCC
(*5)
STLD
(*5)
Model
CAL (*1)
ALM-R
SLCD
*1:
B/R
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
Output
limit
Velocity
limit
Clamped
output
PMV
Output
track
Range
track
PVI
P/Pd
PVI-DV
PID
PI-HLD
PID-BSW
Auxiliary
output(*1)
Output
signal
conversion(*1)
B/A/Sb
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pw/P
d
wf/Sb
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
d
b
ONOFF
ONOFF-E
ONOFF-G
ONOFFGE
(*2)
(*2)
P/Pd
S2
P/Pd
S2
P/Pd
S3
P/Pd
S3
P/Pd/M/M
D
d
PID-TP
x (*3)
PD-MR
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
d
b
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pw/P
d
wf/Sb
PI-BLEND
PID-STC
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-14
Output
limit
Velocity
limit
MLD
MLD-PVI
MLD-SW
Model
Clamped
output
Range
track
(*2)
M/Md
(*2)
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
d
b
(*2)
M/Md
PMV
Auxiliary
output(*1)
MC-2E
B/A/Pwf/S
b
S2/P2
S3/P3
MC-3
MC-3E
S3/P3
RATIO
PG-L13
(*4)
B/A/S2b/
S3b/
S2s/S3s/S
b
BSETU-3
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
d
b
B/A/Sb
BSETU-2
M/Md
SS-H/M/L
AS-H/M/L
B/A/Pwf/S
b
S2/P2
MC-2
VELLIM
Output
signal
conversion(*1)
Output
track
B/A/Sb
B/A/Sb
B/A/Sb
SS-DUAL
B/A/Sb
FOUT
(*5)
FFSUM
P/Pd/M/M B/A/Pwf/S
d
b
XCPL
M/Md
SPLIT
PTC
B/A/Pwf/S
b
B/A
(*6)
ALM-R
YS Blocks
(*7)
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
P: PV
Pd: PV
M: MV
Md: MV
B: Unconverted output (function block)
A: Analog output
D: Time-proportioning ON/OFF output
Pw: Pulse width output (without FB)
Pwf: Pulse width output (with FB)
S2: 2-position status output
S3: 3-position status output
P2: 2-position pulsive output
P3: 3-position pulsive output
S2b: 2-position status output (BSETU-2/3 only)
S3b: 3-position status output (BSETU-2/3 only)
S2s: 2-position status output through switch instrument (BSETU-2/3 only)
S3s: 3-position status output through switch instrument (BSETU-2/3 only)
Sb: Subsystem output
Selectable by builder setting.
The velocity limiter functions when the block is in AUT mode, but not when the block is in MAN mode regardless the setting
for [MAN Mode Velocity Limiter Bypass].
Always restricted by MSH/MSL
Only tracking of the CLP status of the output destination is performed.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-15
NR
OOP
IOP
HI
LO
PVI
PVI-DV
PID
PI-BLEND
PID-STC
MLD
MLD-PVI
MLD-SW
RATIO
PG-L13
VELLIM
SS-H/M/L
AS-H/M/L
SS-DUAL
PI-HLD
PID-BSW
ONOFF
ONOFF-E
ONOFF-G
ONOFF-GE
PID-TP
PD-MR
MC-2
MC-2E
MC-3
MC-3E
BSETU-2
BSETU-3
FOUT (*2)
FFSUM
XCPL
SPLIT
PTC
ALM-R
SLCD
SLPC
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-16
NR
OOP
IOP
SLMC
SMST-111
SMST-121
SMRT
HI
LO
SBSD
SLBC
SLCC
STLD
*1:
*2:
x: Available
Blank: Not available
FOUT does not have an alarm status. Nevertheless, the output fail check and the bad connection status alarm check are
performed and the results are transmitted to the upstream function block. An output fail of FOUT is generated when output fail
is detected at all FOUT output destinations.
Table 1.1.3-4 Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block-2
Process alarms (*1)
Model
DV+
DV-
PVI
PVI-DV
VEL+
VEL-
x
x
PI-BLEND
PID-STC
PID
PI-HLD
MHI
MLO
CNF
Other
alarms
PID-BSW
ONOFF
ONOFF-E
ONOFF-G
ONOFF-GE
PID-TP
PD-MR
MLD
MLD-PVI
x
x
MLD-SW
x
x
MC-2
MC-2E
MC-3
TRIP
PERR
ANS+
ANSINT
Not available
Not available
MC-3E
RATIO
HDV
LDV
PG-L13
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-17
DV+
DV-
VEL+
VEL-
MHI
MLO
CNF
Other
alarms
NPLS (*2)
BDV+
BDVLEAK
BEND
BPRE
Not available
BSETU-2
BSETU-3
VELLIM
SS-H/M/L
AS-H/M/L
SS-DUAL
x
x
x
x
FOUT (*3)
FFSUM
XCPL
SPLIT
PTC
ALM-R
SLCD
SLPC
SLMC
HALM
MALM
LALM
RALM
SMST-111
SMST-121
SMRT
SBSD
END
PRE
LERK
SLBC
END
PRE
LERK
HDV
SLCC
STLD
*1:
*2:
*3:
x: Available
Blank: Not available
The NPLS alarm is only supported in the BSETU-2 but not in the BSETU-3.
FOUT does not have an alarm status. Nevertheless, the output fail check and the bad connection status alarm check are
performed and the results are transmitted to the upstream function block. An output fail of FOUT is generated when output fail
is detected at all FOUT output destinations.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-18
1.1.4
Name of function
block
O/S
IMAN
RCAS ROUT
PVI
PVI- DV
PID
PI-HLD
Sampling PI controller
block
PID-BSW
ONOFF
Two-position ON/OFF
controller block
ONOFF-E
Enhanced two-position
ON/OFF controller
block
ONOFF-G
Three-position ON/OFF
controller block
ONOFFGE
PID-TP
Time-proportioning
ON/OFF controller
block
PD-MR
PI-BLEND
Blending PI controller
block
PID-STC
MLD
MLD-PVI
MLD-SW
MC-2
Two-position motor
control block
MC-2E
Enhanced two-position
motor control block
Three-position motor
control block
MC-3
MC-3E
RATIO
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-19
Name of function
block
O/S
IMAN
RCAS ROUT
PG-L13
BSETU -2
Flow-totalizing batch
set block
BSETU -3
Weight-totalizing batch
set block
VELLIM
SS-H/M/L
AS-H/M/L
Autoselector block
SS-DUAL
Dual-redundant signal
selector block
FOUT
FFSUM
Feedforward signal
summing block
XCPL
Non-inteference control
output block
SPLIT
PTC
ALM-R
Representative alarm
block
SLCD
YS controller block
SLPC
SLMC
SMST-111
YS manual station
block with SV output
YS manual station
SMST-121 block with MV output
lever
SMRT
SBCD
SLCC
YS blending controller
block
SLBC
YS batch controller
block
STLD
YS totalizer block
*1:
x: Valid
-: Invalid
: For MLD-SW, CAS mode can be specified instead of AUT mode.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-20
1.2
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Input Indicator Block (PVI):
Input
processing
IN
PV
OUT
(PV, PV)
SUB
The table below shows the connection method and connected destination of the I/O terminals
of the Input Indicator Block (PVI):
Table 1.2-1 Connection Method and Connected Destination of I/O Terminals of Input Indicator Block
(PVI)
I/O terminal
IN
Measurement input
OUT
Process
variable
output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-21
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PVI block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Default
-----
O/S (AUT)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*1:
*2:
Range
(*2)
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-22
For more information about valid block modes of the PVI block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-23
1.3
The Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) displays an input signal received
from an I/O module or other function block as a process variable (PV).
In addition to the function to display an input signal as a process variable (PV), Input Indicator
Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV) provides two other functions: deviation alarm check
and setpoint value limiter.
By presetting a deviation alarm setpoint (DL), the deviation (DV) of the setpoint value (SV)
from process variable (PV) can be confirmed.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm
(PVI-DV):
-
SV
DV
+
Input
processing
IN
PV
OUT
(PV, PV)
SUB
Figure 1.3-1 Function Block Diagram of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm (PVI-DV):
Table 1.3-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Input Indicator Block
with Deviation Alarm (PVI)
I/O terminal
IN
Measurement input
OUT
Process
variable
output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-24
The only processing timing available for the PVI-DV block is a periodic startup. Selections
available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period. Moreover, it is possible to specify the scan coefficient and the scan phase.
*1:
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
This section describes the deviation alarm check function and the setpoint value limiter function, which constitute some of the processing performed by the PVI-DV block.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PVI-DV block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
When the deviation (DV) exceeds the high limit of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL):
A positive deviation alarm (DV+) is generated.
When the deviation (DV) falls below the low limit of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL):
A negative deviation alarm (DV-) is generated.
The deviation (DV) of the process variable (PV) from the setpoint value (SV) is represented by
the following expression:
DV=PV-SV
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the deviation alarm check, refer to:
5.6, Deviation Alarm Check in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint value limiter, refer to:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-25
Block mode
ALRM
Range
Default
O/S (AUT)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
SL
DV
Deviation
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
-----
*1:
SEE
Data Name
(*2)
For more information about valid block modes of the PVI-DV block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-26
1.4
Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of deviation so that the relationship between the deviation and control output
change (MV) becomes non-linear.
Non-linear gain
Non-linear gain
Description
Gap action
Lowers the proportional gain to moderate control effects when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output actions include positional type and velocity type.
Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct action) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.
Deadband action
I/O compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the controller block is operating automatically.
I/O compensation
Input compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the
input signal of the PID control computation.
Output compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the output signal of the PID control computation.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH,
SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with
the remaining one.
Bumpless switching
Initialization manual
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-27
Description
Control hold
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action.
This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
AUT fallback
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating
in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using
values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Computer failure
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the
automatic operating mode.
Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode has been changed to
PRD.
For more information about the control computation processing functions specific to each controller block, refer to:
1.7, PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) on page 1-68
1.8, Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller
Block (ONOFF-E) on page 1-76
1.9, Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE) on page 1-83
n Non-Linear Gain
Non-Linear Gain
The non-linear gain function changes the proportional gain in accordance with the deviation of
the process variable (PV) from the setpoint value (SV) in the control computation. As a result,
a non-linear relationship is formed between the manipulated output change (MV) and the
deviation of the process variable (PV) from setpoint value (SV).
The non-linear gain function is used for pH control, in which the process gain often becomes
too high near the target value, or for buffer tank level control, whose purpose is to stabilize the
discharge volume while maintaining the tank level within the limits.
The actions that realize the non-linear gain function include gap actions and squared deviation actions.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-28
MV
Kpe
En
Non-linear
gain computation
GW
MV:
Kpe:
En:
GW:
Kp:
Kp
n Gap Action
The gap action moderates control effects by lowering the proportional gain when the deviation
is within the preset gap width (GW).
GW
| En |
Kp
The figure below shows the non-linear gain characteristics of the gap action:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-29
Effective proportional
gain (Kpe)
Kp
Knl=1.0
Knl=0.5
Knl=1.0
Knl=0.25
Knl=0.0
Deviation (En)
Knl=0.5
0.5
Knl=0.25
0.25
Knl=0.0
0
Gap width
(GW)
Deviation (En)
Gap width
(GW)
Gap width
(GW)
Equivalent deviation:
The deviation equivalent to a state
in which no non-linear gain is specified.
| En | GW
1.0 (linear)
| En |>GW
-
0.5
1 Kp
2
(1-
GW
) Kp
2 | En |
0.25
1 Kp
4
(1-
3GW
) Kp
4 | En |
(1-
GW
) Kp
| En |
Figure 1.4-3 Relationship between the Non-linear Gain Coefficient and Effective Proportional Gain
| En |
GW
Kp
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-30
Once the deviation exceeds the limits of the gap width (GW), the effective proportional gain
(Kpe) is represented by the following expression:
Kpe = Kp
The figure below shows the non-linear characteristics of the squared deviation action:
Effective proportional
gain (Kpe)
Equivalent
deviation
(En')
Kp
Deviation (En)
Gap width
Deviation (En)
(GW)
Gap width
(GW)
Equivalent deviation:
The deviation equivalent to
a statein which no non-linear
gain is specified.
Gap width
(GW)
Velocity Type
Adds the current manipulated output change (MVn) to the value readback from the output
destination (MVrb) and determines the manipulated output value (MVn).
The computational expression of the velocity-type control output action is shown below:
MVn=MVrb+MVn
Positional Type
Adds the current manipulated output change (MVn) to the previous output value (MVn-1) and
determines the manipulated output value (MVn).
The computational expression of the positional-type control output action is shown below:
MVn=MVn-1+MVn
1-31
The control action direction function switches between direct action and reverse action that
reflect the increase or decrease of manipulated output value.
The direct action and reverse action indicate the increase and decrease directions of the manipulated output value (MV) corresponding to deviation changes.
When the setpoint value (SV) is fixed, the relationship between the process value (PV) and
the manipulated output value (MV) in direct action and the reversed action is shown as follows.
Direct action
The control action in which the manipulated output value (MV) increases as the process
variable (PV) increases, or decreases as the process variable decreases.
Reverse action
The control action in which the manipulated output value (MV) decreases as the process
variable (PV) increases, or increases as the process variable decreases.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the control action direction:
Control Action: Select Direct or Reverse.
The default is Reverse.
Reset Windup
In PID control computation, the value obtained via the integral action represents an integrated
value of deviation by time. Therefore, when a batch control stops, if the deviation prolongs,
the integral term in PID control computation becomes saturated due to the integral action.
This condition is called reset windup (integral saturation).
For example, reset windup often occurs in the following situation:
The control computation value exceed the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML) and the output is limited by the H/L limiter.
The output to the manipulation terminal is switched off by an Auto-selector blocks, etc.
Manipulated output is used as the additional signal from a PID controller block (PID) for
the purpose of fine-adjust of the base load feedforward control.
When reset windup occurs, the control result tends to overshoot, and as a result the process
becomes unstable. In a control loop that reset windup may happen, you should select positional-type control output action and use the reset limit function.
The reset limit function carries out the correction to the PID control computation with the values read from the connected destinations via the RL1 and RL2 terminals.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-32
The values read from the connected destinations via RL1 and RL2 terminals are used as reset signals RLV1 and RLV2. The reset signals RLV1, RLV2 are used to perform the following
correction computation to the output value of PID computation (MVn0). Thus, when the output MV is limited by the manipulated variable high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML), the
reset limit exerts directly on the integral term of the output value (MV'), the value before MV in
computation.
If the RL1 terminal is not connected, the value readback from the output destination is used
as the reset signal value RLV1. If the RL2 terminal is not connected, 0 is used in computation as reset signal RLV2.
MVn=MVn0+
T
TI
x WU x (RLV1-RLV2-MV'n-1)
RLV2:
T:
Control period
TI:
Integral time
WU:
Reset limit coefficient is a parameter for adjusting the reset limiter calculation. The bigger this
coefficient is, the faster the MV can pullback against the reset windup.
Reset limit coefficient can be defined on Output tab of the Function Block Detail Builder.
Reset Limit Coefficient: Select 1, 2, 5 or 10
Default: 1
The following phenomena occur during velocity-type Control Action:
Reset windup
Normally reset windup do not happen to the velocity-type control output actions, since the
cumulative value of manipulated output changes (MV) of each scan period is limited.
However, if the values readback from the output destination are not limited by the MV H/L
scale setpoints nor by the MV H/L limiter, the manipulated output change (MV) of each
scan period is accumulated, similar to the positional-type actions. Consequently, the reset
windup happens.
1-33
Output
destination data
DMVn
PID
computation
RLV1
RLV2
RL1
RL2
MV'n
Output limiter
MVn
OUT
Figure 1.4-5 Reset Limit Function for a Positional-Type Control Output Action
When the reset limit function is not used, positive or negative values is continuously added to
the integral term of the manipulated output change (MVn) so long the positive or negative
deviation exists. If the situation sustains, the manipulated output change (MV) is added to
the control computation value (MV') continuously and make it reach the MV scale high limit
(MSH) or the MV scale low limit (MSL) or the manipulated variable high-limit or low-limit setpoint (MH, ML) and continue to windup. As a result, saturation (reset windup) happens to the
integral term of the control computation value (MV'). Because the integral term is saturated,
the manipulated output value (MV) limited by the limiter does not move back even when the
sign of deviation changes to the pullback direction. The MV starts to pullback only when the
control computation value (MV') returns to the range between the manipulated output highlimit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML).
In the same situation, if the reset limit function is used, the integral term of the manipulated
output value (MV') will be limited to the value RLV1 - RLV2 as a result of correction computation. Even if the deviation sustains, the reset windup does not happens.
Example on the Figure Reset Limit Function for a Positional-Type Control Output Action, neither the RL1 or RL2 terminal is connected. Therefore, the reset signal RLV1 is the readback
value from the output destination, while the value of reset signal RLV2 is 0. For example,
suppose a loop is in cascade (CAS) mode, if the manipulated output (MV) is limited by the
manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH), the reset signal RLV1 becomes the manipulated
variable high-limit setpoint (MH). In this situation, the integral term of the control computation
value (MV') is adjusted gradually to the value obtained by subtracting RLV2 from RLV1 (i.e.,
MH), even when the deviation sustains, it does not exceed the manipulated variable high-limit
setpoint (MH).
The manipulated output value (MV) will quickly move away from the limit when the sign of the
manipulated output change (MV) reverses and agrees to the pullback direction of the value
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-34
from output limiting. This is because the control computation value (MV') is limited within the
manipulated variable high-limit and low-limit setpoints (MH, ML).
PID
OUT
SET
PID
OUT
Figure 1.4-6 Reset Limit Function for a Simple Cascade Control loop
PID
OUT
IN1
AS-H
IN
PID
OUT
OUT
SET
PID
IN2
OUT
IN
RL1
Figure 1.4-7 Reset Limit Function Used for Auto-Selection via Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-35
CALCU
OUT
RL2
IN
SET
OUT
PID
IN
FFSUM
OUT
SET
RL1
PID
OUT
IN
Figure 1.4-8 Reset Limit Function Used in Feedforward Control (Base Load Control)
n Deadband Action
Deadband Action
The deadband action stops the manipulated output value (MV) from changing while the deviation (DV) is within the preset deadband (DB) range, by causing the manipulated output
change (MV) to be 0.
HYS
MVn0
DB
MVn:
MVn0:
DB:
En :
HYS:
DB
En
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-36
The Input or Output Compensation function adds the compensation value (VN) received from
outside to the input signal or output signal of PID control computation, while the controller
block is operating automatically in the automatic (AUT), cascade (CAS), or remote cascade
(RCAS) mode.
The Control Action of Input or Output Compensation include the following two types:
Input compensation
Output compensation
The compensation value (VN) is reset to 0 automatically at the beginning of each control period. This prevents the previous external compensation value is added to (VN) when the external compensation data not exist.
Normally, the external data is set directly to the compensation value (VN) from other function
block. However, the external data from other function block can be connected to the compensation input terminal (BIN), then set to the compensation value (VN).
For manual operation, the manually set manipulated output value (MV) is not affected by the
Input or Output Compensation.
n Input Compensation
Input Compensation
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-37
The input compensation is a control action that adds the compensation value (VN) received
from outside to the input signal of PID control computation.
CB
CK
PV
PVn
CVn
MV
PID
VN
OUT
DLAY-C
n Output Compensation
The output compensation is a control action that adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the output signal of PID control computation.
1-38
MVn=MVn0+CK(VN+CB)
MVn : Manipulated output after output compensation
MVno : manipulated output before output compensation
CK
CB
VN
CB
CK
PV
PVn
PID control
computation
MVn0
MVn
IN
IN
CALCU
PID
VN
OUT
OUT
The process variable tracking function prevent the abrupt changes in the manipulated output
value (MV) when change from the manual (MAN) mode to automatic (AUT) mode, by forcing
the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-39
If force the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV) in manual mode operation via process variable tracking, abrupt Control Action can be avoided when the mode
switches to automatic (AUT).
Suppose a primary loop is in cascade connection and controls in the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode. If the mode of the secondary loop in the cascade connection switches
from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT), the cascade connection becomes open and the control action of the primary side loop can stop. In this situation, the setpoint value (SV) of the
primary loop can be forced to agree with the process variable (PV) by the process variable
tracking function.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the process variable tracking.
Measurement tracking
MAN mode
Select Yes or No. The default is No.
The statuses referred to as MAN, AUT and CAS include remote backup modes such as
AUT (ROUT) and AUT (RCAS).
For a 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
(ONOFF-G) or Time - Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP), the definition is allowed for MAN mode only.
The action of the setpoint value limiter in automatic (AUT) or manual (MAN) mode varies depending on whether the setpoint value (SV) can be set to a value beyond the range between
SVH and SVL or not. This setting can be changed from the option of [Prohibit setting SV to a
value beyond the range of SVL and SVH] on the properties sheet of the project.
When the option of [Prohibit setting SV to a value beyond the range of SVL and SVH] is
checked, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions:
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) greater than the setpoint high limit (SVH):
An error message will be displayed and the value beyond the setpoint high limit becomes
invalid, the previous setpoint value will be held.
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL):
An error message will be displayed and the value beyond the setpoint low limit becomes
invalid, the previous setpoint value will be held.
When the option of [Prohibit setting SV to a value beyond the range of SVL and SVH] is not
checked, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions:
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) greater than the setpoint high limit (SVH):
An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator's confirmation. When
confirms, the operator can set a value greater than the setpoint high limit (SVH) as the
setpoint value.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-40
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL):
An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator's confirmation. When
confirms, the operator can set a value smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL) as the setpoint value.
However, when try to set a setpoint value (SV) to a value beyond the range between the process high alarm setpoint (PH) and the process low alarm setpoint (PL), the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions regardless if the option of [Prohibit setting SV to a value beyond the range of SVL and SVH] is checked or unchecked:
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) greater than the process high alarm setpoint (PH):
An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator's confirmation. When
confirms, the operator can set a value greater than the process high alarm setpoint (PH)
as the setpoint value.
When try to set a setpoint value (SV) smaller than the process low alarm setpoint (PL):
An acknowledgment dialog box appears to prompt for the operator's confirmation. When
confirms, the operator can set a value smaller than the process low alarm setpoint (PL)
as the setpoint value.
When the function block is in remote cascade (RCAS) mode and the setpoint value (SV) is
defined to automatically follow the remote setpoint value (RSV) received from the supervisory
system computer, the setpoint value limiter performs the following actions:
The value exceeds the setpoint high limit (SVH) is forced to be equal to the setpoint high
limit (SVH).
The value smaller than the setpoint low limit (SVL) is forced to be equal to the setpoint
low limit (SVL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
RSV
CSV
AUT/MAN
RCAS
1-41
CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
Figure 1.4-14 Relationship among Setpoint Values (SV, CSV and RSV)
The action of the setpoint value pushback varies in accordance with the block mode of the
function block.
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value downstream in cascade without causing the manipulated output value (MV)
to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies with the control output action and block mode
status.
1-42
OUT
SET
FOUT
SET
PID
J08
SET
PID
Figure 1.4-15 Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Cascade Signal Distributor Block is Used)
SET
PID
OUT
SET
OUT1
SPLIT
OUT2
SET
PID
PID
Figure 1.4-16 Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Control Signal Splitter
Block is Used)
SET
PID
S11
DSET
OUT
S10
SW-33
S12
SET
S13
SET
PID
PID
Figure 1.4-17 Example of a Multiple Downstream Loop Configuration (when a Switch Block is Used)
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-43
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the function block to initialization
manual (IMAN) mode.
Since the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track the
value of the connected destination, even when the mode changes from initialization manual
(IMAN) mode to manual (MAN) mode, the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will precede the
manual (MAN) mode. Therefore, the manual (MAN) mode does not take effect.
The block returns to the original mode as soon as the initialization manual condition vanishes.
However, if the mode change operation is performed in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode,
the block will switch to the mode of this operation after the initialization manual condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition. It suspends the control
action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN) mode.
The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the initialization manual condition is established.
The initialization manual condition is depicted as follows:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade loop open).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a switch block (SW-33,
SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade loop open).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a process output, and
a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the process output.
When the data status of the input signal at the TIN or TSI terminals become invalid (BAD)
in the tracking (TRK) mode while the output signal is not a pulse-width type.
n Control Hold
The control hold is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily
while maintaining the current block mode. Unlike initialization manual, the control output action is performed normally during control hold.
The control hold action takes place when the following conditions are established during automatic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS):
The connected destination of the IN terminal is open (i.e., not selected via a selector
switch, etc.) and,
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-44
The connected destination of the IN terminal or the connected destination of the data at
the first connected destination is a process input, and the process input is temporarily in a
non-response state (momentary power failure).
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control forcibly by changing
the block mode to manual (MAN). This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is
established.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode
regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to manual operation
state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remain manual (MAN) even
after the condition vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
An example of the MAN fallback condition is shown as follows:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS)IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the process variable (PV) is invalid (BAD) or calibration (CAL).
However, the MAN fallback condition will not be established when the block mode is primary direct (PRD), or remote output (ROUT) excluding any compound mode during computer backup.
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the module has been changed via maintenance.
n AUT Fallback
AUT Fallback
The AUT fallback is an error processing function that switches the block mode from cascade
(CAS) or primary direct (PRD) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is established. Thus the set value of the control loop can be set by the operator.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-45
Once the AUT fallback condition is established, the block mode remain automatic (AUT) even
after the condition vanishes.
n Computer Fail
Computer Backup Mode
When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote cascade (RCAS) mode or remote output (ROUT) mode temporarily and switches to the computer
backup mode.
When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT, CAS or PRD to RCAS or PRD is
sent while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer backup mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
The transient state mode is a compound block mode consisting of the block mode before
the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS, PRD) and a remote
mode (RCAS, ROUT).
2.
Then the function block tests the computer condition in the first scan after the block mode
change command and switches to the computer backup mode.
The computer backup mode is a compound block mode consisting of the backup mode
set via the Function Block Detail Builder (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS,
ROUT).
3.
If the computer recovers while the function block is in the computer backup mode, the
block mode changes to remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-46
The computer fail condition is a block-mode transition condition used to suspend actions in
the remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT) mode and switches the mode to the
computer backup mode.
A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function block to define the remote cascade (RCAS) or
remote output (ROUT) mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has
failed or recovered. The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table
or other function blocks.
Switching to a computer backup mode does not take effect if the backup switch (BSW) is on a
block mode other than remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).
An example when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the computer backup
mode is shown as follows:
RCAS
Computer fails
AUT
(RCAS)
Computer recovers
RCAS
An example when the manual (MAN) mode has been specified for the computer backup
mode is shown as follows:
AUT
ROUT command
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the computer backup mode for each function
block.
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place:
1-47
Any block mode change command to make the function block into automatic operation
state (AUT, CAS, PRD, RCAS or ROUT mode) becomes invalid.
The Block mode change interlock condition is established when the switch at the connected
destination of the interlock switch input terminal (INT) is turned ON. This switch is manipulated in the process control sequence and the switch is turned on when the sequence judge
that the loop can not run in Auto mode, or etc.,.
IMPORTANT
SEE
ALSO
Normally, when changing the block mode to primary direct (PRD), the set parameter (P, I,
D) of the upstream block in cascade need to be adjusted.
When change a block to primary direct (PRD) mode, it is necessary to change the upper
stream block in the same cascade loop to manual (MAN) mode.
When change a block from primary direct (PRD) mode to automatic (AUT) mode, it is better to change the block into manual (MAN) mode first. However, it is possible to change
the block from primary direct (PRD) mode to automatic (AUT) mode directly. In this case,
the block runs measurement tracking to force the set point value (SV) to track the process variable value (PV) so as to avoid the radical change to the control output.
For more information about primary direct (PRD) mode, refer to:
6.1.1, Basic Block Mode in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
MSH-MSL
SH-SL
(CSV-SL)
RMV=MV
IM 33K03E22-50E
SH
SL
1-48
SH-SL
MSH-MSL
(MV-MSL)
CSV=RSV=SV
MSH-MSL
SH-SL
(CSV-SL)+MSL
RMV=MV
When the block mode changes to primary direct (PRD), the downstream block sets its the manipulated output value (MV) to the setpoint value (SV, CSV, RSV), using the computational expression shown below:
SV=
SH-SL
MSH-MSL
(MV-MSL)+SL
CSV=RSV=SV
The output limiter can also be applied when the block mode is PRD.
To limit the direct output value of primary loop, check the option of [Enable output limiter in
PRD mode (XL compatible)] on [Constant 3] tab of FCS properties sheet.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the output limiter actions when the function block is in Primary Direct mode, refer
to:
Pulse Width Output in PRD Mode in 4.8.2, Pulse Width Output Conversion in the Function Blocks
Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-49
1.5
The figure below shows a function block diagram of PID Controller Block (PID):
SET
CSV
RSV
IN
Input
processing
BIN
RL2
TIN
CAS
AUT
MAN
TSI
INT
(TSW)
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
RL1
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
SUB
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of PID Controller Block (PID):
Table 1.5-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of PID Controller
Block (PID)
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
RL1
RL2
BIN
Compensation input
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-50
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
I/O terminal
Interlock
SW input
INT
*1:
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PID block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
PID control
Non-linear gain
Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of deviation so that the relationship between the deviation and manipulated output change (MV) becomes nonlinear.
Non-linear gain
Gap action
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control
output actions include positional type and velocity type.
ALSO
Description
Performs correction computation using values read from the connection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID
control computation. This function prevents reset windup.
Deadband action
Adjusts the manipulated output change (MV) to 0 when the deviation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated
output value (MV) from changing.
I/O compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the
controller block is operating automatically.
I/O compensation
SEE
1-51
Input compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to
the input signal of the PID control computation.
Output compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
output signal of the PID control computation.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable
(PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits
(SVH, SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree
with the remaining one.
Bumpless switching
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual
condition becomes satisfied.
Control hold
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed
normally.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action.
This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes
satisfied.
AUT fallback
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued
using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the
AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Computer failure
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or
ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure
condition becomes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing
to the automatic operating mode.
For more information about control computation processing functions applied in the PID Controller Block, refer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
1-52
The PID control computation is the core of the PID control computation processing, calculating a manipulated output change (MV) by using the PID control algorithms. The PID control
is the most widely used, it combines three types of actions: proportional, integral and derivative.
The figure below shows a block diagram of PID control computation:
P0
I-PD
SV
+
PV
(Note)
Proportional term
computation (P)
PI-D/PID
Integral term
computation (I)
PID
D0
+
+
Range
conversion
MV
Derivative term
computation (D)
I-PD/PI-D
100
PB
E(t)+
1
TI
E(t)dt+TD
dE(t)
dt
TI:
Integral time
TD:
Derivative time
If we use the sampling value derived at each interval of the control period for the above expression, the differential expression of the PID control computation is transformed as follows:
MVn=
100
PB
En+
TD
T
En+
(En)
T
TI
Deviation En=PVn-SVn
PVn:
Process variable
SVn:
Setpoint value
En:
T:
Control period
The subscripts n and n-1 represent the sample against the control period, it stands for the
nth sample or n-1th sample.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-53
The PID Controller Block uses the following five PID control algorithms to perform PID control
computation. The actions vary with the characteristics of a controlled system and the purpose
of control.
For PID control computation, the input variables of the proportional, integral and derivative
terms are different for each PID control algorithm.
The table below shows the PID control algorithms and the input variable of each term:
Table 1.5-3 PID Control Algorithms and the Input Variables
Proportional term
Integral term
PID
En
En
En
I-PD
PV
PV
En
PI-D
En
PV
En
Automatic determination
Automatic determination 2
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the PID control algorithm.
Basic Type
Automatic Determination
Automatic Determination 2
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-54
En+
T
TI
En+
TD
T
(En)
En=PVn-SVn
Kp=
Ks=
T:
100
PB
MSH-MSL
SH-SL
Control period
Proportional gain
PB:
TI:
Integral time
TD:
Derivative time
Ks:
SL:
1-55
MVn=Kp Ks
PVn+
TI
En+
TD
(PVn)
T
Compared to the basic type, the PV derivative type PID control algorithm (PI-D) only performs
proportional and integral Control Action when setpoint value changes, but not derivative Control Action. This algorithm is used in the situations where the better follow up to the setpoint
value change is required, such a downstream control block in a cascade control loop.
The computational expression of the PV derivative type PID control algorithm:
MVn=Kp Ks
En+
T
TI
En+
TD
T
(PVn)
When a PID Controller Block is in cascade (CAS) or remote cascade (RCAS) mode, it uses
the PV derivative type PID control algorithm (PI-D) to perform computation so that the followup the setpoint value change can be improved.
When the block is in automatic (AUT) mode, it uses the PV proportional and derivative type
PID control algorithm (I-PD) to perform computation so that stable control characteristics can
be ensured in the event that an abrupt change occurs in the setpoint value due to a numeric
value setting.
When a PID Controller Block is in cascade (CAS) mode, it uses the PV derivative type PID
control algorithm (PI-D) to perform computation. When the block is in remote cascade (RCAS)
mode or automatic (AUT) mode, it uses the PV proportional and derivative type PID control
algorithm (I-PD) to perform computation.
In the cascade (CAS) mode, the automatic determination type 2 orients to the follow-up capability to setpoint value (CSV) change. In the remote cascade (RCAS) mode, it orients to prevent the abrupt change in the output due to an abrupt change in the remote setpoint value
(RSV).
*1:
IMPORTANT
If the integral time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control
algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for this
trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block to
set the value of integral time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper range and
to avoid it to be set to zero.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-56
Derivative (D)
P0, D=0
Integral (I)
P=0
To set the control action bypass, specify 0 to the set parameter P or D, as shown in the table
above. The proportional gain (Kp) is fixed to 1 when only integral action is required.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
(*4)
SL
CSV
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
VN
-----
MV
(*6)
MSL
RMV
(*7)
MSL
RLV1
MSL
RLV2
MSL
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-57
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
0 to 1000 %
100 %
Integral time
20 seconds
Derivative time
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
GW
Gap width
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
DB
Deadband
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
CK
Compensation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compensation bias
-----
0.000
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
CSW
Control switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
MSH
-----
Data Item
Range (*2)
IM 33K03E22-50E
Default (*2)
1-58
SEE
ALSO
Data Name
MV scale low limit
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
For more information about valid block modes of the PID block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-59
1.6
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD):
SET
CSV
RSV
IN
Input
processing
BIN
RL2
TIN
CAS
AUT
MAN
TSI
INT
(TSW)
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
RL1
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
SUB
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD):
Table 1.6-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
RL1
RL2
BIN
Compensation input
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-60
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
I/O terminal
INT
*1:
Interlock
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connectio not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PI-HLD block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Performs PI control computation for each sampling period only during the specified control time, and holds the manipulated output value (MV) for the remainder of the period.
Non-linear gain
Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of deviation so that the relationship between the deviation and manipulated output change (MV) becomes nonlinear.
Non-linear gain
Gap action
IM 33K03E22-50E
ALSO
Description
Performs correction computation using values read from the connection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID control computation. This function prevents reset windup.
Deadband action
Adjusts the manipulated output change (MV) to 0 when the deviation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated
output value (MV) from changing.
I/O compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the
controller block is operating automatically.
I/O compensation
SEE
1-61
Input compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to
the input signal of the PID control computation.
Output compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
output signal of the PID control computation.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable
(PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits
(SVH, SVL) .
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree
with the remaining one.
Bumpless switching
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual
condition becomes satisfied.
Control hold
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed
normally.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action.
This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes
satisfied.
AUT fallback
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued
using values set by the operator. This action takes place when the
AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Computer failure
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or
ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure
condition becomes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing
to the automatic operating mode.
For more information about control computation processing functions of Sampling PI Controller Block (PIHLD), refer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-62
The PI control computation with hold action performs PI control for each sampling period (TC)
only during the control time (TC) in an automatic operating mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS), and
holds manipulated output for the remainder of the period (TS - TC).
The figure below shows the sampling PI control action:
T (control period)
MV
Output hold
PI computation
output
Time
TC
(control time)
TS (sampling period)
TC
TS
Set the sampling period and control time in advance, in accordance with the following principle:
Sampling period
TS = L+T (2 to 3)
L : Dead time of the process (second)
T : Lag constant of the process (second)
Control time
TC=
TS
10
The value of sampling period represents the time required for the process variable (PV) to be
stabilized after the manipulated output is actually output to the process and its effects are
transmitted throughout the process. When the shortest period of a major disturbance affecting
the process is Tn, if Tn is shorter than the sampling period, the control may become impossible. Therefore, refer the following expression to adjust the sampling period shorter than Tn:
TS
Tn
5
The sampling period and control time are considered as set parameters, and their setting can
be changed during operation.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-63
PVn+
T
TI
En
En=PVn-SVn
Kp=
Ks=
100
PB
MSH-MSL
SH-SL
: Proportional gain
Ks
SVn
En
: Deviation
: Control period
PB
TI
: Integral time
SH
SL
The above PI control algorithm is the same as the PV proportional and derivative type PID
control algorithm (I-PD) of the PID Controller Block (PID) except that the former does not have
a derivative term.
The following are set parameters for control computation processing of the PI control algorithm with hold:
1-64
IMPORTANT
If the integral time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control
algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for this
trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block to
set the value of integral time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper range and
to avoid it to be set to zero.
When PI-HLD starts the control calculation after its Hold period elapsed, the previous process
variable is used as the PVn-1 in proportional term computation, the following two methods can
be selected:
The two calculation methods can be selected on FCS properties sheet. Check the check box
of [CENTUM-XL compatible] in the column of [PI-HLD Control Action after Hold]. When this
option is checked, the PVn-1 in the control algorithm uses the current process variable PVn.
Otherwise, the PVn-1 in the control algorithm uses the process variable right before the Hold
started. By default, [CENTUM-XL compatible] is not checked.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-65
set
set
set
T
(control period)
MV
Output hold
PI computation output
Time
TC
(control time)
TC
TC
The control switch (CSW) is turned ON by other function block, such as a sequence control
block.
When the control switch (CSW) is turned OFF forcibly from outside the block during the control time, output is held immediately.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
(*4)
SL
CSV
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
VN
-----
MV
MSL
(*3)
x
(*6)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-66
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
RMV
(*7)
RLV1
Data Item
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
MSL
MSL
RLV2
MSL
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
0 to 1000 %
100 %
Integral time
20 seconds
TS
Sampling period
0 to 10,000 seconds
1 second
TC
Control time
1 to 10,000 seconds
1 second
GW
Gap width
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
DB
Deadband
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
CK
Compesation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compesation bias
-----
0.000
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
CSW
Control switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
Data Item
Range (*2)
IM 33K03E22-50E
Default (*2)
1-67
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
0, 1
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
MSH
-----
MSL
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
RSW
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the PI-HLD block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-68
1.7
The PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) prevent overshooting so that the process variable (PV) may be brought closer to the target value sooner.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the PID Controller Block with Batch
Switch (PID-BSW):
SET
CSV
RSV
IN
Input
processing
RL1
TIN
(RLV1) (RLV2)
CAS
AUT
MAN
TSI
INT
(TSW)
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
RL2
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
SUB
Figure 1.7-1 Function Block Diagram of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW):
Table 1.7-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of PID Controller
Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW)
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
RL1
RL2
TIN
Tracking
signal input
x
x
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-69
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PID-BSW block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control period
to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control output actions include positional type and velocity type.
Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct action) in
accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.
Performs correction computation using values read from the connection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID control computation.
This function prevents reset windup.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable (PV).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-70
SEE
ALSO
Description
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with the
remaining one.
Bumpless switching
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action.
This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes
satisfied.
Control hold
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block
mode.
During control hold, the output action is performed normally.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
AUT fallback
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the
CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set
by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Computer failure
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while
the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT mode. This action
takes place when the computer failure condition becomes satisfied.
Outputs the cascade setpoint value (CSV) after converting it to a manipulated output value (MV) when the block mode has been changed to PRD.
For more information about control computation processing functions applied in PID Controller Block with
Batch Switch (PID-BSW), refer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
The figure below shows an example of control action performed by the PID Controller Block
with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) when the control action direction is reverse:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-71
(2)
(1)
(2)
Figure 1.7-2 Example of Control Action (Reverse Action) Performed by PID Controller Block with
Batch Switch (PID-BSW)
The following expressions represent the algorithms of calculating the manipulated output value when the process variable (PV) is smaller than the setpoint value minus deviation alarm
setpoint (SV-| DL |) value:
When the deviation immediately after the start of batch operation exceeds the deviation alarm
setpoint, the PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) outputs a manipulated output
value (MV) that is the same as the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML). As a result, the process variable quickly approaches the
setpoint value.
The following expressions represent the algorithms of calculating the control output value
when the process variable (PV) is larger than the setpoint value minus deviation alarm setpoint (SV-| DL |) value:
PID control computation is performed by using the result obtained from the above calculation
as an initial value. When the deviation becomes smaller than the deviation limit range, the
PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) assumes that the process is stabilized and
switches the control algorithm to PID control. At this time, output resumes to the manipulated
variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML) by vanishing
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-72
the bias setpoint (BIAS) value to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from overshooting.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the PID control algorithm.
Basic Type
Automatic Determination
Automatic Determination 2
SEE
ALSO
Lockup Function
Once the PID control action resumes, even when the deviation exceeds the deviation alarm
setpoint (DL), the manipulated output value (MV) does not immediately ramp to the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) or manipulated output low-limit setpoint (ML). This is
because of the lockup function.
When the following condition exists, the manipulated output value (MV) does not change to
the manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH) if the control action direction is Reverse, nor
to the manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML) if the control action direction is Direct:
Condition
PV<SV-| DL |-LK
LK: Lockup setpoint
The set parameters of the PID control computation with two-level output switching:
1-73
IMPORTANT
If the integral time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control
algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for this
trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block to
set the value of integral time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper range and
to avoid it to be set to zero.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
(*4)
SL
CSV
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
MV
(*6)
MSL
RMV
(*7)
MSL
RLV1
MSL
RLV2
MSL
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-74
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Table 1.7-4 Data Items of PID Controller Block with Batch Switch (PID-BSW) (2/2)
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
0 to 1000 %
100 %
Integral time
20 seconds
Derivative time
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
LK
Lockup setpoint
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
BIAS
0 to (MSH - MSL)
0.0
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
CSW
Control switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
Data Item
Range (*2)
IM 33K03E22-50E
Default (*2)
1-75
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
MSH
-----
MSL
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
SL
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the PI-BSW block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-76
(ONOFF-E)>
1.8
n Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced TwoPosition ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E)
Connection
The ONOFF and ONOFF-E (*1) blocks turn On or Off the contact output according to the
result in comparing the process variable (PV) and setpoint value (SV).
*1:
ONOFF-E block can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS. When using ONOFF-E block, it is necessary to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Two-Position ON/OFF Controller
Block (ONOFF or ONOFF-E) :
SET
CSV
RSV
IN
Input
processing
BIN
(VN)
CAS
AUT
MAN
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
INT
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
(PV, PV)
SUB
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF):
Table 1.8-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Two-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF):
I/O terminal
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
IM 33K03E22-50E
x
x
<1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-77
(ONOFF-E)>
I/O terminal
BIN
Compensation input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E):
Table 1.8-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Enhanced TwoPosition ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-E):
I/O terminal
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
BIN
Compensation input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
(ONOFF-E)>
SEE
ALSO
1-78
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the ONOFF, ONOFF-E block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Compares the deviation with ON/OFF hysteresis and obtains a manipulated output value (MV).
I/O compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the controller block is operating automatically. Only input compensation can
be used.
I/O compensation
Input compensa- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the
tion
input signal of the PID control computation.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable
(PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH,
SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with
the remaining one.
Initialization manual
Control hold
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action.
This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
AUT fallback
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating
in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using
values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-79
(ONOFF-E)>
Control computation processing
SEE
ALSO
Description
Computer failure
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the
automatic operating mode.
For more information about the control computation processing functions applied in Two-Position ON/OFF
Controller Block (ONOFF and ONOFF-E), refer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
TIP The output tracking of ONOFF-E block can be set on the function block detail builder in related to the settings
of output processing. The ONOFF block does not have the capability of output tracking.
SEE
ALSO
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-80
(ONOFF-E)>
+
Deviation (En)
ON/OFF hysteresis
0
Time
Direct action
OFF
ON
OFF
0%
100 %
0%
ON
OFF
ON
100 %
0%
100 %
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the ON/OFF hysteresis value.
ON/OFF Hysteresis: Engineering unit data within the PV scale span range.
The default is a value equivalent to 1.0 % of the PV scale span.
0%
0.1 to 49.9 %
50 to 99.9 %
100 %
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
AFLS
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
-----
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-81
(ONOFF-E)>
Data Item
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default (*2)
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Set value
CSV
(*3)
(*4)
SL
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
VN
-----
MV
(*6)
0 to 100 %
0%
RMV
(*7)
0 to 100 %
0%
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Table 1.8-6 Data Items of Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF or ONOFF-E) (2/2)
Data Item
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
CK
Compensation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compensation bias
-----
0.000
PMV
0 to 100 %
0%
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, x
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
0
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.8 Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF), Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-82
(ONOFF-E)>
Data Item
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
OPMK
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the ONOFF and ONOFF-E blocks, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-83
(ONOFF-GE)>
1.9
The ONOFF-G and ONOFF-GE (*1) Blocks change the ON/OFF status of two contact outputs depending on whether a process variable (PV) is in the Low/Middle/High position compared to a setpoint value (SV).
*1:
ONOFF-GE block can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS. When using ONOFF-GE block, it is necessary to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.
CSV
RSV
IN
Input
processing
BIN
(VN)
CAS
AUT
MAN
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
INT
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
(PV, PV)
SUB
Figure 1.9-1 Function Block Diagram of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G):
Table 1.9-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Three-Position
ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G):
I/O terminal
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
x
x
x
x
x
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-84
(ONOFF-GE)>
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
I/O terminal
SUB
Auxiliary
output
BIN
Compensation input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
CSV
RSV
Input
processing
IN
BIN
(VN)
CAS
AUT
MAN
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
INT
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT1
ROUT
OUT2
RMV
(PV, PV)
SUB
Figure 1.9-2 Function Block Diagram of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE):
Table 1.9-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Enhanced ThreePosition ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-GE):
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT1
Manipulated output
OUT2
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
BIN
Compensation input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-85
(ONOFF-GE)>
IMPORTANT
If the OUT1 terminal and the OUT2 terminal are connected to different output modules or if
OUT1 terminal and the OUT2 terminal are connected to FF faceplate blocks or fieldbus function blocks, the simultaneity of the two outputs are not guaranteed.
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the ONOFF-G and ONOFF-GE blocks, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Compares the deviation with ON/OFF hysteresis and obtains a manipulated output value (MV).
Switches the direction of the output action (reverse action or direct action) in accordance with the increase or decrease in deviation.
I/O compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the controller block is operating automatically. Only input compensation can
be used.
I/O compensation
Input compensa- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the
tion
input signal of the PID control computation.
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-86
(ONOFF-GE)>
Control computation processing
SEE
ALSO
Description
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable
(PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH,
SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree with
the remaining one.
Initialization manual
Control hold
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action.
This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
AUT fallback
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating
in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using
values set by the operator. This action takes place when the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Computer failure
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the
automatic operating mode.
For more information about the control computation processing functions applied in Three-Position ON/OFF
Controller Block (ONOFF, ONOFF-GE) , refer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
TIP The output tracking of ONOFF-GE block can be set on the function block detail builder in related to the settings of output processing. The ONOFF-G block does not have the capability of output tracking.
SEE
ALSO
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-87
(ONOFF-GE)>
The action of the control algorithm varies with the control action directions.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the ON/OFF hysteresis.
ON/OFF Hysteresis: Engineering unit data within the PV scale span range.
The default is the value equivalent to 2.0 % of the PV scale span.
(4)
(2)
(5)
Time
Deviation (En)
(1)
(6)
Direct action
OFF
ON
0%
ON
OFF
OFF
50 %
100 %
ON
50 %
0%
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-88
(ONOFF-GE)>
ON/OFF hysteresis (HYS)
(4)
(2)
(5)
Time
Deviation (En)
(1)
(6)
Reverse action
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
50 %
0%
50 %
100 %
0%
50 %
100 %
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
IM 33K03E22-50E
<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-89
(ONOFF-GE)>
Table 1.9-5 Relationship of the Manipulated Output Value (MV) and Contact Output Status (Not at the 0
%, 50 % and 100 %)
Manipulated output value
0 to 24.9 %
25 to 74.9 %
75 to 100 %
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
When connect process I/O contacts to the three-position output, only one contact number
need to be defined to the OUT terminal of the ONOFF-G block. This number will become the
first contact output of the ONOFF-G block. Its succeeding number contact will be automatically assigned to be the second contact output of the ONOFF-G block. When define the first contact point, make sure that the succeeding contact is not assigned for other contact output
module.
When the ONOFF-GE block is configured for tree-position status outputs, the OUT1 terminal
of the ONOFF-GE block can be designated with a contact channel number as the first output
and the OUT2 terminal can be designated with a different contact channel number as the second output.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
(*4)
SL
CSV
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
VN
-----
MV
(*6)
0 to 100 %
0%
RMV
(*7)
0 to 100 %
0%
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Range
(*3)
<1.9 Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G), Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
1-90
(ONOFF-GE)>
Table 1.9-7 Data Items of Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block (ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE) (2/2)
Data Item
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
SVH
Setpoint high-limit
SL to SH
SH
SVL
Setpoint low-limit
SL to SH
SL
DB
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
CK
Compensation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compensation bias
-----
0.000
PMV
0 to 100 %
0%
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the ONOFF-G, ONOFF-GE blocks, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-91
1.10
The Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) changes ON time of contact output proportional to the result of the PID control computation. This block is used for temperature control of an electric furnace.
Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) changes ON/OFF time ratio in proportion to the manipulated output value (MV) obtained by PID control computation to the overall
ON/OFF period. Only the basic scan-cycle can be applied to PID-TP.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller
Block (PID-TP):
SET
CSV
RSV
IN
Input
processing
BIN
RL2
INT
CAS
AUT
MAN
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
RL1
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
SUB
Figure 1.10-1 Function Block Diagram of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP):
Table 1.10-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP):
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
RL1
RL2
x
x
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-92
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
I/O terminal
BIN
Compensation input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PID-TP block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Performs integral actions in accordance with changes in the setPV proportional and derivative PID conpoint value (SV). This ensures stable control characteristics even
trol
when the setpoint value changes abruptly. (*1)
Changes the proportional gain in accordance with the degree of
deviation so that the relationship between the deviation and manipulated output change (MV) becomes nonlinear.
Non-linear gain
Gap action
Non-linear gain
Squared deviation Changes the proportional gain according to the degree of deviaaction
tion when the deviation is within the gap width (GW) range.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The control
output actions are of positional type only. (*2)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-93
Performs correction computation using values read from the connection destinations of input terminals RL1 and RL2 during PID
control computation. This function prevents reset windup.
Deadband action
Adjusts the manipulated output change (MV) to 0 when the deviation is within the deadband range, in order to stop the manipulated output value (MV) from changing.
I/O compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the
controller block is operating automatically.
I/O compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to
the input signal of the PID control computation.
Output compensa- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
tion
output signal of the PID control computation.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable
(PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits
(SVH, SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree
with the remaining one.
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual
condition is established.
Control hold
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode.
During control hold, the output action is performed normally.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is
established.
AUT fallback
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when
the AUT fallback condition is established.
Computer failure
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error is detected by supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or ROUT
mode. This action takes place when the computer failure condition
is established.
*2:
ALSO
Input compensation
*1:
SEE
Description
On FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS, the PID control algorithm can be selected on the Function Block Detail
Builder. The default is PV proportional and derivative type PID control (I-PD).
On FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS, the PID output action can be selected as Velocity Type on the Function
Block Detail Builder. However, the default is Positional Type.
For more information about control computation processing functions applied in the Time-Proportioning
ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP), refer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-94
The computational expression of the PV proportional and derivative type of PID control:
MVn=Kp Ks PVn+
T
TD
En+
(PVn)
TI
T
The parameters the PV proportional and derivative type of PID control (I-PID):
IMPORTANT
If the integral time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control
algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for this
trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block to
set the value of integral time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper range and
to avoid it to be set to zero.
n Control Algorithms Other Than PV Proportional and Derivative (IPD) : FFCS Series/KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS
PID Control Algorithm
For control computation, the PID-TP block holds the same control algorithms as a PID controller block. The algorithms are:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-95
The control algorithm can be specified on the Function Block Detail Builder:
Choose one from the followings.
The default is "PV proportional and derivative type PID control (I-PD)."
When the block mode of the PID Controller Block is remote cascade (RCAS), the PID control
algorithm [Automatic determination] and [Automatic determination 2] will act as follows:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about PV proportional and derivative type PID control (I-PD) algorithm, refer to:
nPV Proportional and Derivative Type PID Control (I-PD) on page 1-94
For more information about the control algorithms other than PV proportional and derivative type PID control
(I-PD), refer to:
nPID Control Computation on page 1-51
The PID-TP block performs time-proportioning ON/OFF output as output signal conversion.
In the time-proportioning ON/OFF output, a contact output (1 point) defined to the OUT terminal is turned ON for the period of time proportioning to the manipulated output value (MV)
within the ON/OFF period.
Proportional to manipulated output value (MV)
ON
OFF
Time
ON/OFF period (constant)
On time (sec.) = ON/OFF period (sec.)
The time-proportioning ON/OFF output is always off against 0 % and on against 100 % of the
manipulated output value (MV) respectively. For instance, if the ON/OFF period is 10 seconds
and manipulated output value (MV) is 80 %, the ON time will be 8 seconds.
The time-proportioning ON/OFF period is set through the Function Block Detail Builder.
Time-proportioning ON/OFF Period: 1.00 to 256.00 seconds
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-96
Phasing the ON/OFF period of the function blocks. The phasing is performed according
to the internal block numbers so as to prevent the multiple blocks ON/OFF in the same
phase (*1).
Phasing the ON/OFF period of the I/O modules. For the time-proportioning ON/OFF
pulse period in the Details Setting dialogue box of IOM Builder, set the same value as
the time-proportioning ON/OFF period specified with Function Block Detail Builder. In
addition, specify Operation start offset in the Details Setting dialogue box of IOM Builder so as to prevent a heavy load caused by multiple outputs ON/OFF in the same period
(*2).
*1:
*2:
IMPORTANT
After FCS initial start, the PID-TP MV will be forced to 0 (MSL). The MV saved by [Save tuning parameter] command will be ignored.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
(*4)
SL
CSV
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
VN
-----
MV
(*6)
0 to 100 %
0%
RMV
(*7)
0 to 100 %
0%
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-97
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
RLV1
0 to 100 %
0%
RLV2
0 to 100 %
0%
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Table 1.10-4 Data Items of Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block (PID-TP) (2/2)
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH
0 to 100 %
100 %
ML
0 to 100 %
0%
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
1 to 1000 %
100 %
Integral time
20 seconds
Derivative time
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
GW
Gap width
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
DB
Deadband
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
CK
Compensation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compensation bias
-----
0.000
PMV
0 to 100 %
0%
CSW
Control switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
0 to 100 %
100 %
OPLO
0 to 100 %
0%
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
Data Item
Range
IM 33K03E22-50E
Default
1-98
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
SH
-----
SL
-----
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the PID-TP block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-99
1.11
PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) performs proportional-derivative (PD) control
function. This block may be applied to programmed temperature control process.
The PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR) performs proportional (P) and derivative
(D) control, while the integral (I) may be manually set to be applied to the control function.
In programmed temperature control process, operating conditions do not remain the same
throughout the process time. For example, a chemical process is accompanied by momentary
generations of intense heat. In this case, among all PID actions of the controller block the integral (I) actions may be weakened for a specific period of time during operation so that control is performed only by proportional and derivative (PD) actions. In this type of process, it is
necessary to set a wide proportional band, as a long dead time or large process time constant
tends to cause hunting if an integral (I) action is performed.
By performing only proportional-derivative (PD) actions, the proportional band (P) can be narrowed. In addition, overshooting can be inhibited by shift the control phase by derivative (D)
actions to achieve the better control result.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
(PD-MR):
SET
CSV
RSV
IN
Input
processing
BIN
(VN)
CAS
AUT
MAN
TSI
INT
(TSW)
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
TIN
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
SUB
Figure 1.11-1 Function Block Diagram of PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR):
Table 1.11-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of PD Controller
Block with Manual Reset (PD-MR)
I/O terminal
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
x
x
x
x
x
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-100
I/O terminal
SUB
Auxiliary
output
BIN
Compensation input
TIN
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PD-MR block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The available control output actions are of positional type only.
IM 33K03E22-50E
ALSO
Description
I/O compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside to the
input signal or control output signal of PID computation when the
controller block is operating automatically. Only input compensation can be used.
I/O compensation
Input compensa- Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to
tion
the input signal of the PID control computation.
Causes the setpoint value (SV) to agree with the process variable
(PV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits
(SVH, SVL).
Causes two of the three setpoint values (SV, CSV, RSV) to agree
with the remaining one.
Bumpless switching
Bumpless switching
SEE
1-101
Balance action
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual
condition becomes satisfied.
Control hold
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode.
During control hold, the output action is performed normally.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action.
This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes
satisfied.
AUT fallback
Changes the block mode to AUT when the function block is operating in the CAS or PRD mode, so that the control action is continued using values set by the operator. This action takes place when
the AUT fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Computer failure
Temporarily suspends the control action and switches to the computer backup mode when an error has been detected at a supervisory computer while the function block is operating in the RCAS or
ROUT mode. This action takes place when the computer failure
condition becomes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
For more information about the control computation processing available with the PD Controller Block with
Manual Reset (PD-MR), refer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-102
En+
TD
T
PVn +MR+BLn
En=PVn-SVn
Kp=
100
Ks=
PB
MSH-MSL
SH-SL
BLn= 1-
T
Tbl
BLn-1
Proportional gain
Ks:
En:
Deviation
PVn:
SVn:
PVn:
MR:
BLn:
Balance term. A correction variable used for bumpless switching from MAN to AUT.
TD:
Derivative time
T:
Control period
PB:
Tbl:
SH:
SL:
MSH:
MSL:
In an automatic mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS), the calculated output value (CALCn) is converted
into a manipulated output value (MV) through output processing.
Derivative (D)
0 to 1000 seconds
When D=0, the proportional action does not function.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-103
IMPORTANT
If the balance rate time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for
this trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block
to set the value of balance rate time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper
range and to avoid it to be set to zero.
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the function block mode or switches the cascade
connected downstream blocks manipulated output value (MV) without causing its own manipulated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless switch).
The PD Controller Block with Manual Reset performs bumpless switching based on balance
action.
The PD Controller Block with Manual Reset performs bumpless switching of the block mode
from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT), by using a value obtained by the following expression
as the initial value of the balance term (BLn0):
BLn0=MV-Kp Ks
En+
TD
T
PVn
-MR
BLn0
MR
Time
MAN
AUT
Figure 1.11-2 Bumpless Switching by PD Controller Block with Manual Reset (Balance Action)
When the block mode is not remote output (ROUT) or out of service (O/S), the remote manipulated output value (RMV) tracks the manipulated output value (MV).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-104
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
(*4)
SL
CSV
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
VN
-----
MV
(*6)
MSL
RMV
(*7)
MSL
CALC
MSL
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Range (*2)
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-105
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
1 to 1000 %
100 %
10 seconds
Derivative time
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
MR
MSL to MSH
MSL
CK
Compensation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compensation bias
-----
0.000
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
MSH
-----
MSL
-----
Data Item
*1:
*2:
SEE
ALSO
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
For more information about valid block modes of the PD-MR block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-106
1.12
Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) may be applied to the multiple elements flow control
(blending control) to maintain the totalized flow value of each blending component at a constant ratio (blending ratio).
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND):
SET
CSV
RSV
Input
processing
IN
TIN
INT
(TSW)
CAS
AUT
MAN
SV
RCAS
MAN
Control
computation
processing
PV
TSI
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
SUB
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND):
Table 1.12-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Blending PI
Controller Block (PI-BLEND)
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data referTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ence
connection
I/O
block
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-107
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PI-BLEND block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Bumpless switching
Bumpless switching
Balance action
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-108
SEE
ALSO
Description
Initialization manual
Control hold
MAN fallback
AUT fallback
Computer failure
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks
from changing to the automatic operating mode.
For more information about the control computation processing functions applied in Blending PI Controller
Block (PI-BLEND), refer to:
1.4, Control Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks on page 1-26
DVRn
TK
TS
TS
: Scan period
TK
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-109
The time scale conversion is to convert the raw cumulative deviation value that represents a
totalized deviation value, from a value of flowrate unit (e.g., m3/h) to that in a weight or volume unit (e.g., m3). The time scale conversion coefficient (TK) used in the above computational expression is a value in seconds representing the unit time of the flowrate unit. For example, if the unit of the process variable (PV) is m3/h, set 3600 as a time scale conversion
coefficient (TK).
The computational expression of the control algorithm used by the Blending PI Controller
Block.
MVn =
Kp Ks
8
T En +
T
TI
ESn +BLn
En= PVn-SVn
Kp=
Ks=
100
PB
MSH-MSL
SH-SL
Kp
: Proportional gain
Ks
: Balance term. A correction variable used for bumpless switching from MAN to AUT.
: Control period
TI
: Integral time
PB
SH
SL
The control cumulative deviation value (ESn) used for PI control computation is equivalent to
the cumulative deviation value (DVn) limited by the deviation alarm setpoint (DL).
When DVn| DL |
ESn= +| DL | TK
When-| DL |<DVn<| DL |
ESn=DVRn TS
When DVn-| DL |
ESn=-| DL | TK
1-110
When Yes is specified for process variable tracking and the block mode changes from
manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT).
When the cumulative deviation reset switch (RST) is set to 1, it returns to 0 automatically
when resetting is complete.
IMPORTANT
If the integral time of control block is set to zero or to a value beyond the range, the control
algorithm stops functioning. No process alarm or system alarm message is initiated for this
trouble. So that when using a general purpose calculation block or sequence table block to
set the value of integral time, it is necessary to enforce the value within the proper range and
to avoid it to be set to zero.
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the function block mode or switches the downstream blocks manipulated output value (MV) without causing its own manipulated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The Blending PI Controller Block performs bumpless switching based on balance action.
The Blending PI Controller Block performs bumpless switching of the block mode from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT), by using a value obtained by the following expression as the
initial value of the balance term (BLn0):
BLn0=-
Kp Ks
8
T En +
T
TI
ESn
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-111
Control period
BLn
BLn0
AUT
Figure 1.12-2 Bumpless Switching by Blending PI Controller Block (PI-BLEND) (Balance Action)
When the block mode is not remote output (ROUT) or out of service (O/S), the remote manipulated output value (RMV) tracks the manipulated output value (MV).
The cumulative deviation alarm check is a function that determines whether the absolute value of the cumulative deviation (DV) exceeds the absolute value of the cumulative deviation
alarm setpoint value (DL).
When it is determined that the absolute value of the cumulative deviation (DV) exceeds the
absolute value of the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint value (DL) in the positive direction,
a positive direction cumulative deviation alarm (DV+) is activated. Similarly, when it exceeds
the setpoint in the negative direction, a negative direction cumulative deviation alarm (DV-) is
activated.
When an alarm has occurred, if the cumulative deviation (DV) absolute value drops lower
than the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL) absolute value minus the alarm hysteresis
value (HYS), the alarm is returned to normal state.
DV
| DL |
HYS
Time
| DL |
HYS
DV
The cumulative deviation alarm check type, cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL), cumulative deviation range (DV) and the alarm hysteresis value can be set.
The cumulative deviation alarm check type is set with the Function Block Detail Builder. The
default is detection of both directions.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-112
No alarm
Detection is not performed.
When single direction is selected for the cumulative deviation alarm check type, only the deviation in the positive direction is monitored when the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL)
has a plus sign, and only the deviation in the negative direction is monitored when the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint has a minus sign.
DV Range
The cumulative deviation range can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Cumulative deviation range: Set engineering unit data (absolute value)
5 significant figures
Engineering unit data within the range of 0 to DV scale span, or percentage data for the DV scale span
When specifying percentage data, add % after the numeric value.
Default is 1.0 %.
In the control error alarm check it is determined whether or not the absolute value of the cumulative deviation (DV), which may continue to increase even after the activation of the cumulative deviation alarm, exceeds the absolute value of the control error alarm setpoint value
(VL).
If it is determined that the absolute value of the cumulative deviation (DV) exceeds the absolute value of the control error alarm setpoint value (VL), a positive direction control error alarm
(HDV) is activated if the deviation is in the positive direction. And, when the deviation is in the
negative direction, a negative direction control error alarm (LDV) occurs.
When an alarm has occurred, if the cumulative deviation (DV) absolute value drops lower
than the control error alarm setpoint (VL) absolute value minus the hysteresis value, the alarm
is returned to normal state.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-113
SV
0
Deviation
PV
| DL |
| VL |
The control error alarm check type, control error alarm setpoint (VL) and the alarm hysteresis
value can be set.
The control error alarm check type is set with the Function Block Detail Builder. The default is
detection of both directions.
No alarm
Detection is not performed.
When single direction is selected for the control error alarm check type, only the deviation in
the positive direction is monitored when the control error alarm setpoint (DL) has a plus sign,
and only the deviation in the negative direction is monitored when the control error alarm setpoint has a minus sign.
Engineering unit data within the range of 0 to DV scale span, or percentage data for the DV scale span.
When specifying percentage data, add % after the numeric value.
Default is 1.0 %.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-114
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
(*4)
SL
CSV
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
MV
(*6)
MSL
RMV
(*7)
MSL
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(DSH - DSL)
DSH - DSL
DL
(DSH - DSL)
DSH - DSL
*1:
Range (*2)
(*3)
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
MSL to MSH
IM 33K03E22-50E
Default (*2)
MSH
1-115
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
MSL to MSH
MSL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
1 to 1000 %
100 %
Integral time
20 seconds
TK
1 to 100,000
RP
Ramp constant
0 to (MSH - MSL)
MSH to
MSL
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
RST
0, 1
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
O/S (MAN)
SL
-----
MSH
-----
MSL
-----
DSH
-----
DSL
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
ML
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the PI-BLEND block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-116
1.13
The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) has both the PID control function and selftuning function (STC function). This function block is used to automatically adjust PID parameters (P, I, D).
The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) has both the PID control function and selftuning function (STC function). The STC function automatically sets PID parameters (P, I, D).
The STC function provides the following two merits:
Maintains optimum controllability in spite of the static and dynamic process characteristics
variation.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PIDSTC):
SET
CSV
RSV
IN
Input
processing
PV
BIN
RL1
RL2
TIN
CAS
AUT
MAN
TSI
INT
(TSW)
SV
RCAS
MAN
Self-tuning control
computation
processing
CAS/AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
SUB
Figure 1.13-1 Function Block Diagram of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC)
The figure below shows a block diagram of the self-tuning control computation processing
area of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC):
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-117
Estimated
process
model
PID
parameter
calculation
Process
characteristic
estimation
Response
monitoring
P I D
SV
PID
controller
MV
PV
Process
Figure 1.13-2 Block Diagram of the Self-Tuning Control Computation Processing Area
The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) estimates process characteristics while monitoring process variables (PV) and manipulated output values (MV) to create an estimated
process model. Optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) are calculated based on the estimated
process model.
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC):
Table 1.13-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Self-Tuning PID
Controller Block (PID-STC)
I/O terminal
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
RL1
RL2
BIN
Compensation input
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-118
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PID-STC block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the PID control function, refer to:
1.13.1, Control Algorithm of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) on page 1-122
For more information about the self-tuning function (STC function), refer to:
1.13.7, Tuning Parameters of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) on page 1-137
1.13.8, Points of Using Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) on page 1-146
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
BSTS
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Block status
-----
RUN, OFF
ALRM
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-119
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default (*2)
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint value
(*4)
SL
CSV
SL
RSV
(*5)
SL
DV
VN
-----
MV
(*6)
MSL
RMV
(*7)
MSL
RLV1
MSL
RLV2
MSL
*1:
(*3)
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Table 1.13-3 Data Items of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) (2/3)
Data Item
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-120
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
0.0 to 1000.0 %
100.0 %
Integral time
20.0 seconds
Derivative time
0.0 seconds
GW
Gap width
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
DB
Deadband
0 to (SH - SL)
0.0
CK
Compensation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compensation bias
-----
0.000
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
CSW
Control switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
MSH
-----
MSL
-----
*1:
*2:
Table 1.13-4 Data Items of Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) (3/3)
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
STC
x (*2)
TR
Process 95 % response
time
NB
Data Item
Range
Default
-1, 0, 1, 2, 3
0 (*2)
1 to 10,000 seconds
40 seconds
Noise band
1.0 % to 20.0 % of PV
1.0 % of PV
OS
0, 1, 2, 3
MI
MV impulse amplitude
0.0 % to 20.0 % of MV
5.0 % of MV
PMAX
0.0 to 1000.0 %
1000.0 %
PMIN
0.1 to 1000.0 %
0.1 %
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-121
Range
Default
10000.0
seconds
IMIN
0.1 seconds
DMAX
2000.0 seconds
PIDC
0.00 to 1.00
1.00
CR
0.000 to 100.000
-----
LM
-----
TM
-----
GM
0.000 to 100.000
-----
PA
0.0 to 1000.0 %
-----
IA
-----
DA
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
IMAX
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the PID-STC block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-122
1.13.1
Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) obtains manipulated output value (MV) and manipulated output change (MV) based on PID algorithm.
SEE
ALSO
P0, D=0
Integral (I)
P=0
If you want to run the PID controller in proportional-integral (PI) action, you may set a value
other than 0 to parameter (P) and set to parameter (D). If run the controller in integral (I) actions only, you may set 0 for parameter (P). In this case, even set a value for parameter (D),
the derivative (D) action does not work. When execute integral (I) action only, the proportional
gain (Kp) becomes 1.
IMPORTANT
The Self - Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) is unable to control astatic processes by
using integral (I) actions only. If the process type is set as astatic system (integral system)
and only integral (I) action defined, the block changes to STC function invalid (INVL) status,
and stops the STC function.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-123
1.13.2
The self-tuning function (STC function) determines a tuning index based on the estimated
process model, PID control algorithm, process type and control target type, to calculate optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) in accordance with the obtained tuning index.
SEE
ALSO
Initialize start
Auto-startup
On-demand tuning
n Tuning Index
Generally, in a normal PID controller block (PID), optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) vary with
the purpose of control: to follow up the setpoint value or to prevent from disturbances. Therefore, it is difficult to tune parameters in a single set of PID parameters (P, I, D) to obtain the
optimum responses for the prompt follow-up of set point value change as well as to restrain
from external disturbances. The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) changes the index (tuning index) according to the control target and the PID control function algorithm and
block mode, so that optimum responses can be obtained based on each tuning index.
The table below shows the tuning indexes of the Self-tuning function (STC function):
Table 1.13.2-1 Tuning Indexes
Control algorithm
Tuning index
Block mode CAS
PID
I-PD
Disturbance suppression
response
Disturbance suppression
response
Disturbance suppression
response
PI-D
Automatic determination /
Disturbance suppression
Automatic determination
response
2
The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) calculates PID parameters (P, I, D) of the
setpoint value follow-up type when the PV derivative type (PI-D) control algorithm is used,
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-124
and calculates those of the disturbance suppression type when the PV proportional and derivative type (I-PD) control algorithm is used.
When the STC function calculates PID parameters based on the result of process estimation,
the following processing are performed:
When the block detects that response is tending to hunt, the tuning stops when such
hunting occurs only for one cycle to ensure safety.
When the gain of the controller block is increased, the change is limited to ensure safety.
When the deviation remains large for a prolonged period of time, the gain of the controller
block increases.
For PFCS.
For FCSs except PFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-125
1.13.3
The self-tuning operating mode (STC operating mode) determines the action of the Self-tuning function (STC function). The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) uses five types
of STC operating modes.
The block status of PID-STC indicates the running function of the STC block.
SEE
ALSO
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-126
STC=-1
STC operating
mode
STC=2
STC=3
STC=0, 1
PV and MV data
Manual mode
Block mode
(*1)
Manual mode
Block mode
Automatic mode
No
Automatic
mode
Manual mode
Block mode
Automatic
mode
Change in PV
Yes
Estimation of
process
characteristics
No
Auto-startup
processing
On-demand
processing
High estimation
accuracy
Yes
Calculation of
PID parameters
STC=0
Operating mode
recovery
Operating mode
STC=1
Setting of PID
parameters
Return
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-127
AUT
MAN
AUT
MAN
AUT
All
-1
All
All
1
-1
2
*1:
*2:
AUT
MAN
AUT
All
All
-1
MAN
-1
Action
MAN
MAN
AUT
MAN
AUT
MAN
AUT
Suspends the startup action. Stops STC actions. The block mode
changes to MAN.
All
Stops the startup action. The block mode and block status
change to MAN and PVER, respectively.
All
Stops the startup action and returns to STC=0. The block mode
and block status change to MAN and PVER, respectively.
All
All
All
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-128
For more information about self-tuning operating mode selection switch (STC), refer to:
nSTC Operating Mode Selection Switch (STC) on page 1-139
n Block Statuses
The block status of the PID-STC block shows the current operating status of the STC functions. PID-STC has 7 block statuses, the basic statuses and the combined statuses (combination of multiple statuses) are all indicating the STC running functions.
RUN
OFF
OFF
WMUP
WarM UP
Performing initialization - gathering necessary I/O data to start STC functions. While this is occurring, the
STC functions are disabled (*1).
PLMT
STUP
Auto STart UP
PVER
Shows that because PV is abnormal, new PID parameters couldnt be computed, and auto startup
processing was aborted.
INVaLid
*1:
ALSO
Explanation
The block is periodically acquiring inputs and outputting outputs.
Self-tuning operation; STC operation mode setting is
zero or positive.
INVL
SEE
Name
Self tuning functions are stopped, but the equivalent PID block functions are operating normally.
Code shown on
HIS
OFF
Explanation
Shows that STC functions are stopped. This means that STC
operation mode is set to 1. However the PID block functions
are operating normally.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-129
Code shown on
HIS
Explanation
INVL(OFF)
INVL
RUN
RUN
WMUP(RUN)
WMUP
PLMT(RUN)
PLMT
STUP(RUN)
STUP
PVER(RUN)
PVER
INVL
Shows that STC operation mode is set to STC function execution status (STC0), but because some parameter is invalid,
STC functions cannot be executed. However, the PID block
functions are operating normally.
If you correct the problem, STC functions will operate again.
INVL(WMUP(RUN)) INVL
INVL(STUP(RUN))
Shows that because some parameter is invalid, STC auto startup functions cant be run. However, the PID block functions are
operating normally.
If you correct the problem, STC functions will start to operate.
INVL(RUN)
INVL
Except when block status of the STC functions is OFF, I/O data is continuously sampled. The
process model depends not only on current data but also on data over a preset period into the
past.
While the STC functions are acquiring necessary data for estimating the process model, the
STC functions operate in standby - in WMUP status. STC initialization is performed in the following cases:
When STC mode is switched from STC= 1 to STC=0 or from STC= 1 to STC=1.
When an alarm such as IOP, which indicates that I/O data is affected, occurs.
The length of the initialization period is related to the PID-STC controller block mode at the
time that initialization is started, as follows:
For auto mode (AUT, CAS, RCAS) : 4 TR
Otherwise:
2 TR
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-130
1.13.4
Initializer Start
Initializer start can be executed in the situation that allows to use the estimated initial values
of PID parameters (P, I, D).
The initializer start function uses estimated PID parameters (P, I, D) to start control.
PID data set high/low limits (PMAX, PMIN, IMAX, IMIN, DMAX)
IMPORTANT
Before changing the block mode to any of the automatic modes (AUT/CAS/RCAS), confirm
that measured signals are within the safety range where step changes (MI) can be added to
manipulated output signals, and the measured process signals are sufficiently stable.
When the following operations are performed with the above parameters set, initializer start
will be executed after the time set as the process 95 % response time (TR) has elapsed:
1.
Change the STC operating mode to the PID parameter display or PID automatic updating
mode.
2.
Upon executing initializer start, PID control and self-tuning starts using the values set for PID
parameters (P, I, D) as initial values.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-131
1.13.5
Auto-Startup
In the process where step response can be obtained, use auto-startup if initial setpoint values
of PID parameters (P, I, D) cannot be estimated, such as when the plant is first started.
The auto-startup function starts control by automatically calculating the process 95 % response time (TR), noise band (NB) and PID parameters (P, I, D) based on data obtained via
step responses.
n Execution of Auto-Startup
The methods of auto-startup are shown below. To execute auto-startup, the following conditions must be satisfied:
When the following operations are performed after the above conditions established, autostartup can be executed.
1.
2.
The block status changes to STUP (during auto-startup), and the current manipulated
output value (MV) is held for 30 seconds.
2.
Step signal set as the MV Impulse amplitude (MI) is added to the manipulated output value (MV) in the direction of increasing deviation.
3.
Observation of the response waveform of measured signals relative to the step change is
started.
If, during the observation, the measured signal change (PV) becomes equivalent to or
larger than 1.5 times of the MV Impulse amplitude (MI), the manipulated output value
(MV) returns to the original value to ensure safety.
4.
If the target process is a static system (IP=0), the manipulated output value (MV) returns
to the original value after the response waveform is observed for a specified period of
time. If the process is an astatic system (IP=1), the step changes equivalent to the MV
Impulse amplitude (MI) is added to the manipulated variable in the reverse direction, then
the manipulated output (MV) returns to the original value.
5.
Process characteristics is estimated based on the data obtained by the step response observation.
6.
The process 95 % response time (TR) and PID parameters (P, I, D) are calculated based
on the estimated model.
7.
The following computations on the PID parameters (P, I, D) of the estimated model are
performed, and the computed results are set as PID parameters high/low limits (PMAX,
PMIN, IMAX, IMIN, DMAX).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-132
PMAX=4 PB
PMIN= PB
4
IMAX=4 TI
IMIN= TI
4
DMAX=4 TD
Figure 1.13.5-1 Computational expressions
Some of these values may be fixed to 0 depending upon the control method.
8.
Measured noise is observed for a specified period of time (2xTR; minimum 2 minutes,
maximum 5 minutes), and the noise band (NB) is calculated based on the peak value.
9.
The STC operating mode automatically changes to the PID parameter automatic updating mode (STC=1), then PID control and self-tuning start to run.
Auto-startup end
MI signal
application
MV
Tuning end
MI
PV
Waiting for settling
(30 seconds)
Waveform
observation
Block status "STUP"
Noise
observation
Time
Operation after switching to
the PID automatic
updating mode (STC=1)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-133
Auto-startup begin
(STC=2,MANAUT)
Auto-startup end
MI signal
application
MV
Tuning end
MI
MI
PV
Waiting for settling
(30 seconds)
Waveform
observation
Noise
observation
Time
Operation after switching to
the PID automatic
updating mode (STC=1)
Power failure
Change to a block mode other than automatic modes (AUT, CAS, RCAS).
The measured signal change (PV) remains under 0.5 % of the MV Impulse amplitude
(MI) after the maximum observation time (90 minutes) elapsed.
The data status of the manipulated output value (MV) changes to CLP or CND.
When the auto-startup action is stopped, the following changes take place inside the Self-tuning PID controller block (PID-STC):
The block status changes or set the STC operating mode operation stop (STC=-1) cancels
the auto-startup abnormal termination status.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-134
IMPORTANT
Do not use auto-startup for systems whose process dead-time is short. This is because an
abnormal termination processing of the auto-startup may not be carried out if the process
dead-time is 4 seconds or less. If an abnormal termination processing could not be carried
out, the block status remains as STUP.
If an auto-startup has been used by mistake, change the block mode to MAN mode and interrupt the auto-startup.
: P=0
PI control
: P0, D=0
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.13.6
1-135
On-Demand Tuning
On-demand tuning is applied to tune PID parameters (P, I, D) when tuning request is given
from the operator. On-demand tuning may be applied to the loops where the change of setpoint values need to be avoided.
The self-tuning operating mode (STC operating mode) is the PID parameter display or
PID automatic updating mode
IMPORTANT
Before changing to the on-demand tuning mode, confirm that the value of the MV Impulse
amplitude (MI) is well within the safe range.
When the STC operating mode is changed to on-demand tuning in the above state, on-demand tuning may be executed.
During on-demand tuning, the following actions take place:
1.
Step signal equivalent to the MV Impulse amplitude (MI) is added to the manipulated output (MV) in the direction of decreasing deviation.
If the process type is astatic system (IP=1), the pulse of TR/5 in time span will be added.
2.
After the step signals is added, the STC operating mode returns to 0 or 1 in the next
control period.
3.
The response waveform of a measured signal that corresponds to the step change is
monitored.
4.
MV
PV
Time
Tuning
Set as STC=3
(on-demand command)
If responses from the process are extremely monotonous, an estimated model may not be
created. In this case, increase the MV Impulse amplitude (MI) and retry the self-tuning.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-136
Set a value that may trigger the process variable (PV)s impulse response around 5 %.
Within the range allowed by the process, the bigger the impulse response from the process
variable (PV) the more accurate estimation can be provided by the model.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-137
1.13.7
This tuning parameters of PID-STC block consist of three types; Setting parameters that may
be set on the tuning view; Parameters for indication and the parameters defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
n Tuning Parameters
The tuning parameters of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) include the following types:
The table below shows the parameters that are set from the tuning view:
Table 1.13.7-1 Parameters Set from the Tuning View
Symbol
Name
Entry enable/
disable(*1)
Range
Default
STC
STC operating
mode selection
switch
-1, 0, 1, 2, 3
0 (*3)
TR
Process 95 %
response time
1 to 10000 seconds
40 seconds
xx
NB
Noise band
1.0 to 20.0 % of
the PV value (*5)
1.0 %
(*5)
xx
OS
Control target
type
0, 1, 2, 3
MI
MV Impulse
amplitude
0.0 to 20.0 % of
the MV value (*6)
5.0 %
(*6)
Proportional
band
0.0 to 1000.0 %
100.0 %
xx
xx
xx
Integral time
0.1 to 10000.0
seconds
20.0 seconds
xx
xx
xx
Derivative time
0.0 to 10000.0
seconds
0.0 second
xx
xx
xx
PMAX
Proportional
band high limit
0.0 to 1000.0 %
1000.0
%
xx
PMIN
Proportional
band low limit
0.1 to 1000.0 %
0.1 %
xx
IMAX
Integral time
high limit
0.1 to 10000.0
seconds
10000.0
seconds
xx
IMIN
Integral time
low limit
0.1 to 10000.0
seconds
0.1 seconds
xx
(*4)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-138
Symbol
Entry enable/
disable(*1)
Name
Range
Default
-1
DMAX
Derivative time
high limit
0.0 to 10000.0
seconds
2000.0
seconds
xx
PIDC
0.00 to 1.00
1.00
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
Display Parameters
The table below shows display parameters. These parameters are displayed in the tuning
view to indicate the operating status of the STC function.
Table 1.13.7-2 Display Parameters
Symbol
Name
Entry
enable/
disable
(*1)
Range
CR
0.000 to 100.000
LM
0.0 to 10000.00
seconds
TM
0.1 to 10000.0
seconds
GM
0.000 to 100.000
PA
0.0 to 1000.0 %
IA
1.0 to 10000.0
seconds
DA
0.0 to 10000.0
seconds
*1:
The table below shows the tuning parameters of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PIDSTC) defined in the Function Block Detail Builder:
Table 1.13.7-3 Items defined in the Function Block Detail Builder
Symbol
Name
Entry
enable/
disable(*1)
Range
Default
-1
IP
Process type
0, 1
0 (non-integral)
ON, OFF
ON
*1:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-139
The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) calculates the time for measured signal
waveform observation as well as sampling time for process characteristic estimation, based
on the process 95 % response time (TR). To operate the STC function in a good condition, an
optimum value for the process 95 % response time (TR) is required.
When the process can be approximated based on the first-order lag system
Obtain TR that satisfied TR=L+3T, from the dead time (L) and first-order lag constant (T)
of the process, and set the obtained value as the process 95 % response time (TR).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-140
95 %
Time
TR
Estimation from the damped oscillatory waveform
TR=TP
PV
TP
Specific
oscillation cycle
Time
Time
Set a value that is twice of the peak value of random noise being superimposed over measured signals (maximum width of noise).
Select a control target type and specify a numeric value indicating the type.
The table below shows the control target types (OS) that can be set for the Self-Tuning PID
Controller Block (PID-STC):
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-141
Target overshoot
0%
Overshoot:
5%
Overshoot: small
Settling time: short
10 %
15 %
Characteristics
Evaluation expression
zero
Overshoot:
Rise time:
medium
slightly quick
Overshoot:
Rise time:
large
quick
Overshoot zero
Minimum time-load control area
Min
| e | tdt
| e | dt
e 2 tdt
0
No overshoot exists.
1
Minimizes the product of the evaluation expression that multiplies the deviation area by
elapsed time. The overshoot is smaller and setting time is shorter.
2
Minimizes the control area (deviation). This is the default setting.
3
Minimizes the squared area of deviation. The overshoot is larger and rise time is quicker.
Control area
SV
PV response
Time
Set a value that may trigger the process variable (PV)s impulse response around 5 %.
As the auto-startup mode is a MAN state, the current control deviation is assumed to be on
the safe side and the test signal is added in the direction of increasing control deviation. In the
on-demand mode, which is an AUT state, the test signal is added in the direction of decreasing control deviation.
The table below shows the directions of MV step changes:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-142
Deviation
Auto-startup
On-demand
Action mode
Direct action
Reverse action
SVPV
+MI %
-MI %
SV<PV
-MI %
+MI %
SVPV
-MI %
+MI %
SV<PV
+MI %
-MI %
P: Proportional band
I: Integral time
D: Derivative time
During operation in the PID parameter automatic updating mode, the values set for PID parameters (P, I, D) are used as initial values and updated automatically when the self-tuning
function (STC function) is activated.
Set initial values for PID parameters (P, I, D) using the following methods:
New Process
When estimation or calculation is possible based on the statistical data of other processes
Use values estimated or calculated based on the statistical data of other processes.
n PID Data Set High/Low Limits (PMAX, PMIN, IMAX, IMIN, DMAX)
If the process is likely to receive negative impacts when PID parameters (P, I, D) exceed their
specified limit, set PID data set high/low limits in advance.
The PID data set high/low limits indicate control ranges that are used to limit PID parameters
(P, I, D) when they are changed by the STC function.
The PID parameters (P, I, D) are limited within the range of the corresponding high/low limits:
PMIN P PMAX (Same for PA when the STC value is 1)
IMIN I IMAX (Same for IA when the STC value is 1)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-143
If the set high limit is smaller than low limit, the corresponding PID parameter (P, I or D) will be
fixed to the high limit value. If the DMAX value is 0, the value of the PID parameter (D) becomes 0. If the PMAX value is 0, the value of the PID parameter (P or D) becomes 0.
If, due to the STC function any PID parameter (P, I, or D) exceeds the control range during
operation in the PID parameter automatic updating mode, the block status changes to PID parameter limiting (PLMT) and the PID parameter (P, I or D) obtained by the STC function will be
limited within the range of the corresponding PID data set high/low limits (PMAX, PMIN, IMAX, IMIN or DMAX).
The PID parameter limiting (PLMT) status is canceled when the applicable PID parameter (P,
I or D) has changed to a value inside the control range or when the STC actions have stopped (STC=-1).
PA
: PB calculated value
IA
: TI calculated value
DA
: TD calculated value
IMPORTANT
When exceptional tuning is performed at slow response or hunting response processing, the
PID update ratio coefficient (PIDC) is ignored and the PID parameter values (PA, IA, DA) calculated by the STC function will be set directly as PID parameters (P, I, D).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-144
The process type indicates whether the target process is a static system (non-integral system)
or astatic system (integral system). The process type is specified in the Function Block Detail
Builder.
Process Type: Select Static system or Astatic.
The default is Static system.
The static system is a process whose process variable (PV) changes gradually toward a settling value when step change is added to the manipulated output value (MV), until an equilibrium state is finally reached. The astatic system is a process whose process variable (PV) rises
or falls infinitely with time when step change is added to the manipulated output value (MV).
An example of astatic system is a constant-flow pump whose flowrate is maintained at constant levels via level control.
The figures below show examples of step responses from static system and astatic system
processes:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-145
Time
PV
Time
Figure 1.13.7-5 Examples of Step Responses from Static System and Astatic System Processes
Specify whether to use or bypass the self-tuning function (STC function) when the block is in
a manual operating mode (MAN, PRD or ROUT).
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the MAN mode STC function bypass specification.
STC function bypass designation for MAN mode: Select Yes or No.
The default is Yes.
In general, it is not desirable that PID parameters (P, I, D) change when PID computation is
not performed. Therefore, set Yes as the default bypass specification.
In the bypass mode, the STC function does become active. However, as I/O data is constantly observed, the STC function becomes active as soon as the block changes to an automatic
operating mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS).
If No is set as the bypass specification, the STC function becomes active even in a manual
operating mode (MAN, PRD or ROUT). Setting No as the bypass specification is effective in
the PID parameter display mode or PID parameter automatic updating mode.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.13.8
1-146
This section explains the points to be noted when using the self-tuning function (STC function) in various controlled systems and loops as well as applicability of the function.
The cycle of factors that can cause changes in the control deviation (changes in process
characteristics and setpoint values, etc.) is longer than the specific oscillation cycle of the
control loop.
Responses between the manipulated variable (MV) and process variable (PV) can be approximated by the dead time and first-order lag system or integral system.
In general, many processes can be approximated with a combination of higher-order lag element, dead time, and process gain, by the following expression:
Gp(s)=
Ke-LS
(1+T1S) (1+T2S) ....... (1+TnS)
In estimated models created by the STC function, even the higher-order system used in the
above expression is approximated by the dead time and first-order lag system. The Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) performs appropriate tuning after changes have occurred
in the process variable (PV) as a result of changes in the setpoint value or manipulated variable. Appropriate control is ensured if the ratio of dead time to lag time (L/T) is 3 or smaller.
First, obtain optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) using the STC function.
2.
Change the PID data set high/low limits to reduce the range of PID parameters (P, I, D) or
turn the STC function OFF (STC=-1).
When the dead time/lag time ratio (L/T) of the process is smaller than 3
Appropriate actions can be obtained by combining basic PID functions and the STC function.
When the dead time/lag time ratio (L/T) of the process is larger than 3
It is difficult to perform control by combining basic PID functions and the STC function. In
this case, consider using the Smiths Dead Time Compensation Control or sampled value
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-147
PI control. Note that the STC function cannot be used with either of these control methods.
Temperature
TIC
FIC
Flowrate
Steam
Unless frequent changes occur in the process of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Controller
Block (PID-STC), it is recommended to use the Self-tuning function (STC function) of the upstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) only. The procedure is shown below:
1.
Change the downstream block to AUT mode to open the cascade connection.
2.
Set an optimal PID value using the STC function of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
3.
Turn off the STC function of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
4.
5.
Turn on the STC function of the upstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-148
TC 1
Raw material
TC 2
Cooling
jacket
Water
Reactor
Steam
Split range control valve
Change the downstream block to AUT mode to open the cascade connection.
2.
Set an optimal PID value using the STC function of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
3.
Turn off the STC function of the downstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
4.
5.
Turn on the STC function of the upstream Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
In this type of cascade loop, it is generally recommended that the Self-tuning function (STC
function) be executed only in the upstream controller, which is the main target of control, in
order to avoid interaction between the two STC functions in upstream and downstream.
Pump
Inflow volume
F1
Intermediate
outflow volume
F0
LIC
Tank
Outflow volume
F
FIC
Level
Re-circulated
The above example shows a process where the flowrate F is control target. Since the flowrate
F1, inflow of the tank, fluctuate periodically, the level control is activated to change the intermediate outflow volume F0. The changes in F0 correspond to those in gain that occur in the
target control process of FIC.
If the change cycle of the target control characteristic is longer than the specific oscillation cycle of the control loop, the self-tuning function (STC function) is activated to follow up the
change. If changes in the process variable response are detected as a result of the changes
in the target control characteristic, the STC function will be activated.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-149
n Neutralization Control
The following section shows the points to be noted when using a Self-Tuning PID Controller
Block (PID-STC) for neutralization control.
14
Neutralizing
agent
12
pHC
Controlled fluid
10
pH 8
7
6
pH transmitter
4
2
0
MV (neutralizing agent)
In the neutralization control shown above, the pH process shows non-linear characteristics;
i.e., the gain increases significantly near the neutralizing point (pH=7) and becomes small on
both sides.
The pH controller is controlled by calculating optimum PID parameter values (P, I, D) near the
neutralizing point. Therefore, the proportional band converges by several hundred percent,
making it impossible to obtain appropriate control away from the neutralizing point. In this
case, specify non-linear gain processing for the controller and use the STC function after obtaining linear characteristics.
Q1
Q1 inflow volume
H
Level
gauge
Fluid level H
Constant flowrate
Constant-flow pump
The level control shown above is a process that maintains a constant outflow volume via a
constant-flow pump, regardless of the fluid level. In this process, the fluid level (H) continues
to rise linearly as the inflow volume (Q1) increases. In other words, this is an integral process
that does not have a self-regulation function. When controlling an integral process, use pro-
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-150
portional and derivative (PD) control by setting a longer integral time, as the process becomes
unstable if the integral time is short.
In this type of integral process, use the self-tuning function (STC function) by setting 1 for
the process type (IP). When the process type (IP) is 1, proportional and derivative (PD) control is executed by setting a longer integral time.
Step input
Time
PV
Temperature
Time
Heating phase
Cooling
phase
Figure 1.13.8-6 Example of Step Responses in a Process with Phases of Varying Response Speeds
In a heating furnace or heat exchanger process that requires temperature control, the process
response time may vary with the heating phase and cooling phase. When using a Self-Tuning
PID Controller Block (PID-STC) to control these processes, set the process 95 % response
time (TR) based on the phase with a longer response time.
PID parameters changes between the optimum PID parameters (P, I, D) of the two phases in
accordance with the direction of process variable response actions.
Flow gauge
FIC
Motor-operated
valve
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-151
PID
-
PV
MV
+
-
aTds
1+Tds
Figure 1.13.8-8 Controlling a Process with Slower Actions at the Final Control Element
When performing flowrate control using a motor-operated valve, the speed of response time
control for the motor-operated valve may be affected, as the response time of the motor-operated value is slower than that of the flow gauge. As the self-tuning function (STC function) estimates process characteristics by taking into account delays at the final control element, set a
larger proportional band than when there is no delay at the final control element.
If controllability needs to be further improved, consider using phase compensation by first-order lead computation, in order to compensate for the derivative actions.
Time
TPG
TIC
Heat treatment
furnace
Fuel
When applying a Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) to a program controlling process where the setpoint value of the temperature controller is changed in accordance with a
specific temperature rise and fall pattern, note the following points:
Select the PI-D type (PV derivative type) control algorithm. The I-PD type (PV proportional and derivative type) algorithm provides poor follow-up capability relative to changes in
SV.
If it requires that overshoot of the rising temperature must be minimized, set 0 for the
control target type (OS) of the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC).
In general, when the setpoint value changes along a ramp pattern, as in the case of rising or
falling temperature, the Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) generates an offset. If ondemand tuning is executed at this time, the MV Impulse amplitude (MI) is applied to the manipulated output value (MV) in the direction of decreasing control deviation, then PID parameIM 33K03E22-50E
1-152
ters (P, I, D) are calculated and set automatically based on the response obtained. As a result,
the offset is reduced.
Additional
raw material
input
Batch end
SV
PV
STC stop
STC stop
Time
During PID control, simple batch processes are subject to large disturbances beyond the correctable range through feedback control, as a result of additional charging of raw materials or
discharging of products in large quantities. In such cases, use the STC start and stop functions to build a sequence control process where STC actions stop temporarily when disturbances occur.
If the process is left unattended after batch end, with the setpoint value (SV) maintained at a
constant level in the automatic (AUT) mode, stop the STC function to prevent any unnecessary action of the self-tuning function (STC function).
FC
Pressure
Flowrate
If interaction exists between pressure control and flowrate control, as shown in the figure
above, using the self-tuning function (STC function) in both control loops causes interacting
oscillation when their PID parameters (P, I, D) approach optimum values. In this case, turn off
the STC function of one Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) whose process variable
(PV) is allowed to change, and set larger values for the current effective proportional band
(PB) and current effective integral time (TI). (e.g.: PB=100 to 200 %, TI=30 to 80 seconds)
After this, use the STC function of the other Self-Tuning PID Controller Block (PID-STC) only.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-153
Distillation
column
T1
TC
1
TC
2
m1
LL - 1
-
g21
g22
g12
g11
LL - 2
m2
+
T2
TC 1
PID controller
TC 2
If interaction exists between the column top temperature and column bottom temperature control segments of a distillation column process, first execute non-interacting control.
The method of non-interacting control is shown below:
In the figure, when the transmission function between the output mi and temperature Tj of the
controller TCi is gij. T1 and T2 will be represented as follows after non-interacting elements
LL-1 and LL-2 are applied:
T1 = (g11-g12 g21/g22) m1
T2 = (g22-g12 g21/g11) m2
As a result, the process is divided into two control loops that are regulated based on T1 and
T2, respectively.
Configure STC after confirming the result of this non-interacting control.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-154
1.14
Manual Loader Block (MLD) may be applied to output manipulated output value (MV) to manually operate final control elements, such as control valves.
Manual Loader Block (MLD) outputs manipulated output value (MV) set from operation and
monitoring function. When in tracking (TRK) mode, the tracking input signal received from the
TIN terminal is output as manipulated output value (MV).
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Manual Loader Block (MLD):
TIN
TSI
(TSW)
Output
processing
MV
OUT
(MV, MV)
SUB
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Manual Loader Block (MLD):
Table 1.14-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Manual Loader
Block (MLD)
I/O terminal
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-155
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the MLD block,
refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Block mode
ALRM
Default (*2)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
MV
(*3)
MSL
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
RSW
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
*3:
Range (*2)
O/S (MAN)
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
-----
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the MLD block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-156
1.15
Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI) may output manipulated output value
while displaying the process variable (PV). It may be applied to manually operate final control
elements and observing the process variable (PV) at the same time.
Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI) displays the value input from the IN terminal as process variable (PV). It also outputs the value set from operation and monitoring
function as manipulated output value (MV). In tracking (TRK) mode, the block outputs the
tracking input signal received from the TIN terminal as manipulated output value (MV).
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI):
TSI
TIN
(TSW)
Input
processing
IN
Output
processing
PV
MV
OUT
Figure 1.15-1 Function Block Diagram of Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI):
Table 1.15-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Manual Loader
Block with Input Indicator (MLD-PVI)
I/O terminal
*1:
IN
Measurement input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-157
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the MLD-PVI block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S(MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
MV
(*4)
HH
LL
(*3)
MSL
SL to SH
SH
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-158
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
RSW
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*2:
*3:
*4:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
ML
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the MLD block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-159
1.16
Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) may be applied as the lowest downstream block in the control loops that consist of multiple function blocks.
The Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) selects the manipulated output signals to be sent to final control elements, by switching between the output signal received from
a controller and its own manually manipulated output signal.
In the manual (MAN) mode, the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) outputs
the value set from operation and monitoring function as manipulated output value (MV) to operate the final control element. In the automatic (AUT) mode or cascade (CAS) mode, it performs control computation processing to the value input from other function block (CSV), and
outputs the result as a manipulated output value (MV) while in the manual mode (MAN) it outputs the MV set from the operation and monitoring function.
Whether to set the cascade (CAS) mode or automatic (AUT) block mode for outputting the
result obtained by control computation processing of the value input from other function block,
may be selected for each control station on the property sheet of the FCS:
MLD-SW AUT/CAS: Check CAS or AUT.
The default is AUT.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man
SW (MLD-SW)
SET
TIN
TSI
INT
(TSW)
CSV
GAI CSV+BIAS
SV
Range
adjustment
Control computation
processing
AUT (CAS)
Output
processing
MV
OUT
MAN
(MV, MV)
SUB
Figure 1.16-1 Function Block Diagram of Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW):
Table 1.16-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Manual Loader
Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)
I/O terminal
SET
Setting input
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-160
I/O terminal
*1:
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the MLD-SW
block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Description
Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it to change abruptly when the block mode has been
changed or when the manipulated output value (MV) has
been switched in a downstream block in cascade.
Bumpless switching
Bumpless switching
1-161
Output pushback
Performs inverse operation on the manipulated output value to obtain SV and CSV and uses them as a setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value (CSV), respectively.
Combining this function with output tracking prevents the
manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly
when the mode is changed to automatic.
Bias tracking
Causes the current manipulated output value (MV) to gradually approach the MV value converted from the setpoint
value. This prevents the manipulated output value (MV)
from changing abruptly when the mode is changed to automatic.
Initialization manual
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback
condition becomes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function
blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
MSH-MSL
SSH-SSL
(SV-SSL)+MSL
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-162
Gain (GAIN)
Arbitrary data.
The default is 1.000.
SV Range
Referencing the output range of the connected function block, set the setpoint value (SV)
range:
SV-BIAS
GAIN
The setpoint value pushback action does not take place if GAIN is 0.
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value downstream in cascade without causing the manipulated output value (MV)
to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies with the control output action and block mode
status.
The bumpless switching performed by the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLDSW) include the following types:
Output pushback
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-163
Bias tracking
Output Pushback
The output pushback function calculates a setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value
(CSV) from the manipulated output value (MV) when the block is in the manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN) mode, and put it to the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value (CSV), respectively. Output pushback is used when an upstream block is cascade connected to the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW), and the upstream block is
tracking to the MLD-SW. With the combination of the output pushback and the output tracking
function of the cascade connected upstream control block, the manipulated output value (MV)
of the cascade connected upstream block changes in accordance with the manipulated output
value (MV) of the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) when the cascade connection is open. This action allows to change the block mode for the Manual Loader Block
with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) bumplessly and without
balancing.
The computational expressions of output pushback:
SV=
SSH-SSL
(MV-MSL)+SSL
MSH-MSL
CSV=
SV-BIAS
GAIN
The output pushback action takes place when the following settings are performed:
PV
MV
PID
CAS
(AUT)
MAN
Output pushback
SV
MV
MLD-SW
CAS
AUT/MAN
MV
PID
Figure 1.16-2 Output Pushback and Output Value Tracking when Cascade is Open
In the above action example, bumpless switching is realized by the following three functions:
1-164
Output value tracks the downstream by the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW
(MLD-SW)
Bias Tracking
Bias Tracking
The bias tracking function calculates a bias value (BIAS) that allows the manipulated output
value (MV) to agree with the MV value converted from the cascade setpoint value (CSV), and
replaces the current bias value (BIAS) with the calculated value. Bias tracking is used when
an upstream block cascade connected to the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLDSW) performances the output value tracking function. By using the bias tracking function,
switching of the block mode from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) can be performed bumplessly. When cascade connection is open, the upstream blocks MV does not only follow the
changes of MV of the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) but also adds the
bias of the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW), so that the bump can be avoided when connection switches back to cascade.
The computational expressions of bias tracking:
SV=
SSH-SSL
MSH-MSL
(MV-MSL)+SSL
BIAS=SV-GAIN CSV
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define bias tracking.
Bias Tracking: Select Yes or No.
The default is No.
If Yes is defined for bias tracking, the output pushback and setpoint value ramp actions will
not be performed. If No is defined for bias tracking, these two actions will take place. However, the setpoint value ramp action is not performed if the ramp constant (RP) set parameter
remains at its default value.
When the upstream function block in cascade connection is a Cascade Signal Distributor
Block (FOUT), define Yes for bias tracking. This activates the bias tracking action even
when the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) has multiple output connected destinations and the Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) in cascade is closed when
connected to the second output destination or thereafter.
The setpoint value ramp action causes the current manipulated output value (MV) to gradually
approach the manipulated output value (MV) converted from the setpoint value (SV). This
function is used when a upstream block cascade connected to the Manual Loader Block with
Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) is not defined the output tracking function.
The setpoint value ramp action takes place when the following two block mode changes are
performed:
The block mode changes from manual (MAN) to an automatic (AUT or CAS) mode.
The initialization manual (IMAN) mode is canceled while the block is still in an automatic
(AUT or CAS) mode.
The setpoint value ramp action causes the current manipulated output value (MV) to approach the manipulated output value (MV) converted from the setpoint value (SV), by limiting
the change per-scan period in the setpoint value (SV) that is used to calculate a manipulated
output value (MV) (effective setpoint value) to equivalent to or less than the ramp constant
(RP), when the setpoint value (SV) changes as a result of the above two block mode
changes.
The following example shows the action of the setpoint value ramp:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-165
SV
The setpoint value ramp action takes place only when No is defined for the bias tracking.
The parameter of the setpoint value ramp action:
Ramp constant (RP): Engineering unit data between 0 and the SV scale span range limit.
The default is the SV scale span.
The setpoint value ramp action enables bumpless switching of the cascade status from open
to close, even when the upstream block in cascade connection does not have the output
tracking function and the bias tracking action of the Manual Loader Block with output switch is
disabled.
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
When output value tracking is set to Yes with the Function Block Detail Builder, the manipulated output value (MV) is tracked to the value of the connection destination when initialization
manual goes into effect. Because of this, even if the mode is changed to the manual (MAN)
mode during initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the initialization manual (IMAN) mode takes
priority and the operation to change to the manual (MAN) mode becomes invalid.
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block only
change to that mode when the initialization condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the
initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
1-166
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade loop open).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a switch block (SW-33,
SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade loop open).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a process output, and
a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the module.
When the data status of the input signal at the TIN or TSI terminals becomes invalid
(BAD) in the tracking (TRK) mode while the output signal is not a pulse-width type.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode
regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
AUTMAN
IMAN (AUT) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O module and the
FCS is having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O module, and one
of the I/O points connected to the module is undergoing maintenance load.
1-167
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place:
Any block mode change command to make the function block into automatic operation
state (AUT or CAS mode) become invalid.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S(MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
SV
Setpoint value
SSL
CSV
SSL
MV
MSL
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
GAIN
Gain
-----
1.000
BIAS
Bias
(SSH - SSL)
0.0
RP
Ramp consistant
0 to (SSH - SSL)
SSH to SSL
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV swich
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
*1:
Range (*2)
x
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
*3:
SEE
ALSO
1-168
For more information about valid block modes of the MLD-SW block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-169
1.17
The Motor Control Blocks MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E are applied to operate motor-driven pumps and motor-operated valves. These blocks may be used to start or stop motors from
operation and monitoring functions or to control them automatically.
There are four models of Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E), which behaves in different output manner.
The motor control blocks are provided with function to operate motor-driven pumps and motor-operated valves.
The motor control blocks enable starting and stopping of motors from operation and monitoring functions. Also, combining the motor control blocks with the sequence control function to
realize the automatic control on motors.
The MC-2E (*1) and MC-3E (*1) blocks function the same as MC-2 and MC-3 blocks but
have the additional capability to connect to FF faceplate blocks and fieldbus function blocks.
Moreover, the input terminals for the two contacts and the output terminals for the two or
three contacts can be defined separately so that the two or three irrelevant channels can be
used.
*1:
MC-2E and MC-3E blocks can be applied to all field control stations except standard PFCS. When using MC-2E or MC-3E
block, it is necessary to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3):
IN
FB
SV
FV
TT
Input
processing
Answerback
check function
PV
CSV
RMV
Output
processing
MV
OUT
(BPSW)
SWI
INT
IL
TSI
Figure 1.17-1 Function Block Diagram of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-3)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-3):
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-170
Table 1.17-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Motor Control
Blocks (MC-2, MC-3)
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
I/O terminal
IN
Answerback input
OUT
Manipulated output
FB
Feedback
signal input
TT
Thermal trip
signal input
IL
Operation
interlock input
SWI
Bypass
command
SW input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the motor control blocks (MC-2E):
SV
FV
TT
Input
processing
IN1
Answerback
check function
PV
CSV
RMV
Output
processing
MV
OUT1
OUT2
IN2
FB
(BPSW)
SWI
INT
IL
TSI
Figure 1.17-2 Function Block Diagram of the Enhanced Two-position Motor Control Blocks (MC-2E)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-2E):
Table 1.17-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Enhanced Twoposition Motor Control Blocks (MC-2E)
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN1
Answerback input1
IN2
Answerback input2
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-171
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
I/O terminal
OUT1
Manipulated output1
OUT2
Manipulated output2
*1:
FB
Feedback
signal input
TT
Thermal trip
signal input
IL
Operation
interlock input
SWI
Bypass
command
SW input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the motor control blocks (MC-3E):
SV
FV
TT
Input
processing
IN1
Answerback
check function
PV
CSV
RMV
Output
processing
MV
OUT1
IN2
OUT2
FB
OUT3
(BPSW)
SWI
INT
IL
TSI
Figure 1.17-3 Function Block Diagram of the Enhanced Three-position Motor Control Blocks (MC-3E)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Motor Control Blocks (MC-3E):
Table 1.17-3 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Enhanced
Three-position Motor Control Blocks (MC-3E)
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN1
Answerback input1
IN2
Answerback input2
IM 33K03E22-50E
I/O terminal
*1:
1-172
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
OUT1
Manipulated output1
OUT2
Manipulated output2
OUT3
Manipulated output3
FB
Feedback
signal input
TT
Thermal trip
signal input
IL
Operation
interlock input
SWI
Bypass
command
SW input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IMPORTANT
If the OUTn terminals of MC-2E or MC-3E are connected to different output modules or if the
terminals are connected to FF faceplate blocks or fieldbus function blocks, the simultaneity of
the two or three outputs are not guaranteed. The same phenomenon happens to IN1 and IN2
terminals under the same circumstances.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-173
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the motor control blocks, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Answerback check
Compares the answerback input value (PV) with manipulated output value (MV) and checks if the final control element is operating in accordance with the output signals from the motor control block.
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This
action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Computer failure
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
Serial start
Start count
Counts the number of times the manipulated output value (MV) has
changed from 0 to 2 or from 1 to 2, and uses the obtained value as
the number of starts (OCNT).
Operating time
Totalizes the periods of time during which the manipulated output value
(MV) remains at 1 or 2, and uses the obtained value as the operating
time (ONTM).
Simulation function
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-174
Description
Bypasses actions in accordance with the condition specified by the bypass command switch.
The motor control blocks perform output processing that is different from the output processing performed by other function blocks. The following lists the output processing items specific
to the motor control blocks.
Inching output
Off-service function
The following lists the alarm checks performed by the motor control blocks.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
BSTS
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range
Default (*2)
-----
O/S(MAN)
Block status
-----
NR
ALRM
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
0 to 2
FV
SL
SV
0 to 100 %
0%
CSV
0, 1, 2
MV
(*4)
0, 1, 2
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-175
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
RMV
(*5)
RAW
ONCT
Number of starts
ONTM
ONTH
ONTS
Data Item
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
Range
Default (*2)
0, 1, 2
0, 1, 2
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999 seconds
0 second
0 to 99999999 hours
0 hour
0 to 3599 seconds
0 second
Table 1.17-6 Data Items of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E) (2/2)
Data Item
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
ANSP
Answerback setpoint
SL to SH
SL
MTM
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 seconds
SVH
0 to 100 %
100 %
SVL
0 to 100 %
0%
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
BPSW
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
SIMM
Simulation switch
0, 1
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
PH
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the motor control blocks, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-176
Symbol
Block Status
Name
Description
ANCK
OFF
Off Service
Output is stopped
LOCK
Interlock
SIM
Simulation
NR
Normal
Normal status
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-177
1.17.1
Input signals specific to the Motor Control Blocks include feedback input signal and answerback input signal. Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input, Input Signal Conversion of
Answerback Input and Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input Value into Answerback Input Value are provided for conversion of these signals. FV Overshoot is an input processing
of motor control blocks.
SEE
ALSO
Feedback input signal is used when the feedback terminal (FB) in the motor control block is
connected to analog input modules or other function blocks. The feedback signal often indicates the connected filed equipment status such as the openness of a motor-operated valve.
Answerback input signal is used when the IN terminal in the motor control block is connected
to a contact input or other internal status switch. For M2-CE and M3-CE blocks, the answerback signals are the signals from the FF faceplate blocks, fieldbus function blocks, internal
switches or contact Inputs that connected to IN1 and IN2 terminals. The answerback signal
often indicate the state of onsite equipment such as the open/close status of motor-operated
valve or the start/stop status of pump operation.
The motor control block uses a special input signal conversion corresponding to the feedback
input signal and answerback input signal.
Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input Value into Answerback Input Value
Feedback value (FV) is the signal that the feedback terminal FB received from its connection
destination without conversion. However, if the value from FB is equal to or less than the lowinput cutoff value, the feedback value (FV) is set to 0.
Input signal conversion setting parameters for the feedback input signal are given below.
FV scale high limit (SH) : Set FV engineering unit data.
FV scale low limit (SL) :
Also, the setup for feedback low-input cutoff can be executed on the Function Block Detail
Builder.
Feedback Low-input Cutoff: Set FV engineering unit data.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-178
The answerback input value (PV) is the answerback input signal read from IN or IN1 and IN2
terminals connection destinations, such as connected contact inputs or other internal status
switches then converted into the code values.
There are two kinds of answerback input signal conversion methods. The number of answerback input points is determined depending on the type of conversion.
The selection of input signal conversion type may be performed on the Function Block Detail
Builder.
Input signal conversion type: Set 2-Status Input or 3-Status Input.
The default setting is 2-Status Input.
Direction of Answerback
Direction of answerback specify the meaning of ON/OFF, status of answerback input signal,
which reflect the final control element status if it operates properly according to the manipulated output value (MV) from the motor control block.
The setup for direction of answerback may be performed on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Direction of Answerback
For MC-2, MC-3 blocks: Select Direct, Reverse, Inverted connect direct action or Inverted connect reverse action.
For MC-2E, MC-3E blocks: Select Direct or Reverse.
The default setting is Direct.
The table below shows the correlation between the answerback input value (PV) and contact
status.
Table 1.17.1-1 Determination of Answerback Input Signal
Number of answerback
points
Action of answerback
Direct
1
Reverse
Contact status
PV
Alarm
OFF
ON
OFF
n (*1)
n+1 (*2)
ON
IM 33K03E22-50E
Action of answerback
Direct
Reverse
2
Inverted connection direct
action (*4)
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Contact status
1-179
PV
Alarm
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Hold previous
value (*3)
PERR
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Hold previous
value (*3)
PERR
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Hold previous
value (*3)
PERR
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Hold previous
value (*3)
PERR
ON
OFF
ON
ON
n (*1)
n+1 (*2)
ON
n in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to IN terminal of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the IN1 terminal
of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. The answerback input signal read from the element n represents the status of open; vise versa, when the connection is inverted, the answerback input signal read from the element n represents the status of close.
n+1 in the table indicates the element number succeeding the element number n that is specified to connect to IN terminal
of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the element number specified to connect to IN2 terminal of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. The
answerback input signal read from the element n+1 represents the status of close; vise versa, when the connection is inverted, the answerback input signal read from the element n+1 represents the status of open.
When both open and close answerback signals are true, an error will be initiated.
Inverted connection direct action and Inverted connection reversed action are not available for MC-2E and MC-3E blocks.
The data status of answerback input value (PV) becomes invalid (BAD) if both open and
close answerback input signals are true at the same time, or one of the connection destinations to read answerback input signal is abnormal.
The input open alarm is activated if the status of answerback input value (PV) is invalid (BAD)
due to abnormal status at the connection destination. If the data value is invalid (BAD) because both open and close answerback input signals are true at the same time, the answerback inconsistency alarm (PERR) is activated.
If FVANSP, PV=2
If FV<ANSP, PV=0
The answerback setpoint (ANSP) is a data in the engineering unit that indicates the scale
range between feedback input value (FV), and can be updated as a setting parameter while
the system is running.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-180
If the data status of feedback input value (FV) is invalid (BAD), the status of answerback input
value (PV) is set invalid (BAD) with the previous answerback input value (PV) latched.
If both the answerback input terminal and the feedback input terminal are in connection, the
answerback input precedes. The answerback input is converted into the answerback input
value (PV) through input signal conversion.
If neither the answerback input terminal nor the feedback input terminal are in connection, the
previous answerback input value (PV) is latched.
IMPORTANT
The answerback input signal conversion is not executed in the following states:
When the data status of answerback input value (PV) is calibration (CAL).
Even if the answerback input signal at the IN terminal connection destination is not properly
converted due to one of the above conditions, the data converted through the same answerback input signal conversion (2- or 3-status conversion) as the answerback input value (PV)
are stored in the answerback raw signal input value.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.17.2
1-181
This section describes the control computation processing functions of the motor control
blocks, which are listed below.
Answerback check
Initialization manual
MAN fallback
Computer fail
Serial start
Start count
Operating time
Simulation function
n Answerback Check
The answerback check function checks if the final control elements are operating normally in
accordance with the output signals from the Motor control blocks. Unless the manipulated output value (MV) is changed, the answerback input value (PV) and manipulated output values
(MV) are constantly compared. If the two do not agree with each other, an alarm is generated.
The following types of alarms are generated:
While the answerback error alarm exists, if the answerback input value (PV) and manipulated
output value (MV) becomes equal or the manipulated output value (MV) changes back, the
answerback error alarm (ANS+ or ANS-) vanishes.
After the manipulated output value (MV) changes, it takes some time for the final control elements to complete action. Therefore, the answerback check masking time (MTM) is introduced after the manipulated output value (MV) changes. During this mask time, even when
the answerback input value (PV) and manipulated output value (MV) do not agree, the answerback check does not initiate alarm.
When the manipulated output value (MV) changes, the block status changes to ANCK status,
indicating that the answerback check is in progress. The answerback check masking (ANCK)
status will be canceled when the answerback input value (PV) comes to meet the manipulated output value (MV). When the answerback masking time is elapsed, the answerback
check masking (ANCK) status is also canceled even the answerback input value (PV) does
not meet the manipulated output value (MV).
The answerback check function stops in the following conditions:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-182
When the data status of the answerback input value (PV) is calibration (CAL).
In the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the answerback check masking timer behaves as if
the masking time has already elapsed, and the Motor control blocks maintain their alarm status.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about answerback check masking status, conformity between answerback input value
(PV) manipulate output value (MV), refer to:
lConditions to Release Answerback Check Mask on page 1-182
Answerback Check
Select the answerback check monitoring action from the following three types:
Positive monitoring
Starts the answerback check masking timer at the start of output (OFFON). If the answerback input value (PV) still disagrees with manipulated output value (MV) after the answerback check masking time has elapsed, an alarm is generated. If output is OFF, no
alarm will be generated even when the answerback input value (PV) does not agree with
manipulated output value (MV).
Negative monitoring
Starts the answerback check masking timer at the end of output (ONOFF). If the answerback input value (PV) still disagrees with manipulated output value (MV) after the answerback check masking time has elapsed, an alarm is generated. If output is ON, no
alarm will be generated even when the answerback input value (PV) does not agree with
manipulated output value (MV).
Both-side monitoring
Starts the answerback check masking timer at the start and end of output. If the answerback input value (PV) still disagrees with manipulated output value (MV) after the answerback check masking time elapsed, an alarm is generated.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the answerback check.
Answerback Check: Choose [No], [Both Sides], [Open] or [Close].
The default is [No].
When the block is in the status that the answerback check is masked (ANCK), if the answerback input value (PV) changes to meet the manipulate output (MV), the answerback check
mask (ANCK) will be released. However, user can change the condition for releasing the answerback check mask; thus, the answerback check mask will not be released until the answerback check masking time elapsed.
Moreover, when the block is in the status that the answerback check is masked (ANCK), the
input high-limit alarm (HI) and input low-limit alarm (LO) are also masked. However, if checking input open (IOP) is specified, the input open alarm (IOP) will not be masked.
Conditions to release answerback check mask can be set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
1-183
If [PV=MV or MTM Timeout] is chosen as the condition to release the answerback check
mask, when answerback input value (PV) changes to agree the manipulated output value
(MV), the answerback check mask (ANCK) will be released.
If [MTM Timeout Only] is chosen as the condition to release the answerback check mask,
when answerback input value (PV) changes to agree the manipulated output value (MV), the
answerback check mask (ANCK) will not be released until the answerback check masking
timer (MTM) becomes timeout. When the answerback input value (PV) changed to agree the
manipulated output value (MV) but the block is still in answerback check masking (ANCK) status, if the manipulated output value (MV) is changed again, the answerback check masking
timer (MTM) will be re-initiated.
Answerback Bypass
The answerback bypass function forces the answerback input value (PV) to be equal to the
manipulated output value (MV) and stops the answerback check. The answerback bypass
function is activated when the bypass command switch (BPSW) is 1 or 3.
TIP Even when the serial start is specified, changing the manipulated output value (MV) triggers a transition to the
answerback check inhibition (ANCK) status.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the bypass command switch (BPSW), refer to:
nBypass Command Switch (BPSW) on page 1-189
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-184
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN).
The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes or vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition establishes in the following situation:
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a switch block (SW-33,
SW-91) and the connection is switched off.
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a process output module, and a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the module.
When the data status of the input signal at the TIN or TSI terminals becomes invalid
(BAD) in the tracking (TRK) mode while the output signal is not a pulse-width type.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode
regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the answerback input value (PV) is calibration (CAL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-185
When the answerback abnormality designated on the builder item [Fallback operation on
the abnormal answerback] occurs.
When the switch connected to INT terminal is turned ON (i.e., the interlock condition is
established for changing the block into interlock mode).
When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the module has been changed via maintenance.
n Computer Fail
When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote output (ROUT) mode temporarily and switches to the computer backup mode.
When the function block mode is remote output (ROUT), the function block receives the manipulated output value (MV) from a supervisory system computer via control bus communication.
When the computer fails, the block changes mode to the preset computer backup mode
(MAN, AUT or CAS) which indicates that an abnormality has been detected in the supervisory
computer. When the computer recovers, the block returns to the mode before the change.
The following section is an action flow of the function block from the time the computer fail
condition establishes till it vanishes.
1.
When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT or CAS to ROUT is sent while the
computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer backup
mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
The transient state mode is a compound block mode consisting of the block mode before
the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode
(ROUT).
2.
Then the function block tests the computer condition in the first scan after the block mode
change command and switches to the computer backup mode.
The computer backup mode is a compound block mode consisting of the backup mode
set via the Function Block Detail Builder (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (ROUT).
3.
If the computer recovers while the function block is in the computer backup mode, the
block mode changes to remote output (ROUT).
The computer fail condition is a block-mode transition condition used to suspend actions in
the remote output (ROUT) mode and switches the mode to the computer backup mode.
A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function block to define the remote output (ROUT)
mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has failed or recovered.
The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table or other function
blocks.
Switching to a computer backup mode does not take effect if the backup switch (BSW) is on a
block mode other than remote output (ROUT).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-186
An example when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the computer backup
mode is shown as follows:
ROUT
Computer fails
AUT
(ROUT)
Computer recovers
ROUT
An example when the manual (MAN) mode has been specified for the computer backup
mode is shown as follows:
AUT
ROUT command
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the computer backup mode for each function
block.
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT, CAS, or
ROUT mode) becomes invalid.
n Serial Start
Serial Startup Group, MC Block Serial Startup Interval
The serial start function put the Motor control blocks in the same control station into groups
and starts multiple Motor control blocks in the same group sequentially at a specified interval
when start requests are issued to these blocks simultaneously.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-187
Serial start is executed when the manipulated output value (MV) changes to execute the positive action. For example, serial start takes place if the manipulated output value (MV) changes
from 0 to 2 but not when it changes from 2 to 0.
After start requests have been issued, the Motor control blocks that are waiting for serial start
will remain in the state of not performing output although the manipulated output value is
changing. When this occurs, the answerback check masking time is extended by the time for
which the blocks waiting for serial start.
Define serial start on Function Block Detail Builder and System View.
Serial Startup Group: Specify a value between 0 and 7.
The default is 0.
Set the value in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Serial start is not executed to the group whose group number is 0.
Serial start interval:
n Start Count
Counts the number of times the manipulated output value (MV) has changed from 0 or 1 to 2,
and uses the obtained value as the number of starts (ONCT).
The ONCT count increases from 0 to 99999999 and upon reaching 99999999, returns to 0
with the next count. The number of starts (ONCT) will not be initialized automatically, even
during initial cold start. However, the number of starts (ONCT) is initialized when an arbitrary
ONCT value is set. The number of starts (ONCT) can be initialized at any time as necessary.
The number of starts (ONCT) is not counted in the simulation mode (SIM) or during inching
output operation.
n Operating Time
Totalizes the periods of time during which the manipulated output value remained at 1 or 2,
and stores the obtained value in the operating time (ONTM). The operating time (ONTM) is
indicated in seconds.
The operating time (ONTM) value is totalized from 0 to 99999999, and upon reaching
99999999, returns to 0 with the next count.
The values representing the hour and second digits of the operating time are stored in the operating time hour unit (ONTH) and operating time second unit (ONTS), respectively. The operating time hour unit (ONTH) and operating time second unit (ONTS) are constantly updated in
accordance with changes in the operating time (ONTM).
The operating time (ONTM) will not be initialized automatically, even during initial cold start.
However, if an arbitrary value is set for the operating time (ONTM), the operating time
(ONTM) is initialized by that value. The operating time (ONTM) can be initialized at any time
as necessary.
The operating time (ONTM) is not updated in the simulation mode (SIM) or during inching output operation.
1-188
n Simulation Function
The simulation function simulates the internal processing actions of the Motor control blocks.
This function is used when testing the operation of devices using Motor control blocks.
The following section explains how to set and cancel the simulation mode:
The table below shows actions of the motor control blocks in the simulation mode:
Table 1.17.2-1 Actions of Motor Control Block (MC-2, MC-3) Functions in the Simulation Mode
Function
Action
Block mode
Block status
SIM
Alarm status
No alarm is generated.
Answerback input
Feedback input
No action.
Answerback check
Calibration function
Remote/local input
Answerback tracking
Interlock check
Inching output
Serial start
Start count
No action.
Operating time
Status change message
*1:
If turns ON the simulation mode when the answerback alarm is present, the manipulated output value (MV) is set to be equal
to the answerback input value (PV) immediately.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-189
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the thermal trip check, refer to:
nThermal Trip Alarm Check on page 1-208
The following actions take place in the first scan period after the simulation mode is canceled:
The above actions take place commonly when the output status changes from stop to start,
regardless the cancellation of simulation mode.
Command
Action
No bypass
Normal actions.
Answerback bypass
Interlock bypass
Out of service
Block mode=MAN
Block status=OFF
The answerback tracking action is executed.
The out of service corresponding the switch position 4 instructs the Motor control block to
stop the output action.
The value of the bypass command switch (BPSW) is set by the input signal from the bypass
command switch input terminal (SWI). If the SWI terminal is not connected, the value is set
directly from operation and monitoring functions or other function block.
The table below summarizes various types of bypasses that are explained in the sections of
corresponding functions:
Table 1.17.2-3 Table of Function Bypasses
Function(*1)
TRK
Mode
IMAN
OFF
Block status
LOCK
SIM
Feedback input
Answerback input
Answerback check
BPSW =1.3
PV.CAL
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-190
TRK
Interlock check
Signal output (*4)
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
(*5)
Mode
IMAN
OFF
Block status
LOCK
SIM
BPSW =1.3
PV.CAL
x (*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-191
1.17.3
The Motor Control Blocks, execute special output processing different from other function
blocks.
This section describes the output processing specific to Motor Control Blocks.
Inching Output
Remote/Local Input
Answerback Tracking
Interlock Check
Off-service
Output Tracking
*1:
This MV action can be set only in the FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the block mode is manual (MAN) mode (CRT manual), the manipulated output value
(MV) is set by the following method.
The manipulated output value (MV) is set by the operators operation on the operation
and monitoring function.
For the inching output, the manipulated output value (MV) is automatically set based on
the setpoint value (SV) set by the operator on the operation and monitoring function.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-192
When the block mode is in the tracking (TRK) mode (on-site manual), the manipulated output
value (MV) is set by the following method:
Yes
Yes
No
No
The output signal conversion types and output action directions are described.
The type of output signal conversion can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
When 2-position Status Output or 3-position Status Output is specified, the Output Action
Direction can be defined too.
The output action direction can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-193
Default is Direct.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the output action direction for the motor control blocks, refer to:
The time of ON for contact output for the converted signal of 2-position Pulsive Output or 3position Pulsive Output may be defined in each FCS.
Pulse width may be defined on the property sheet of the FCS.
Pulse Width: 1 to 100 Sec.
Default is 1 Sec.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about pulsive width of motor control blocks, refer to:
Output action
direction
Direct action
2-position status
output
Reverse action
*1:
MV
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
n+1 (*1)
n+2 (*1)
n in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to OUT terminal of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the OUT1
terminal of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. n+1 and n+2 indicates the element number succeeding the element number n that
is specified to connect to OUT terminal or the element number specified to connect to OUT2 and OUT3 terminal of MC-2E
and MC-3E blocks.
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
In the 2-position status output, the state of MV=1 is the same as the state of MV=2.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-194
Output action
Direct action
Reverse action
3-position status
output
*1:
*2:
MV
n (*1)
n+1 (*1)
n+2 (*1)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
n in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to OUT terminal of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the OUT1
terminal of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. n+1 and n+2 indicates the element number succeeding the element number n that
is specified to connect to OUT terminal or the element number specified to connect to OUT2 and OUT3 terminal of MC-2E
and MC-3E blocks.
Inverted connection is not available for MC-2E and MC-3E blocks.
Direct
action
Reversed
action
Inverted
connection
Direct Action
Inverted
connection
Reversed Action
2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-195
Output action
direction
MV
------
n+1 (*1)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
n+2 (*1)
n in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to OUT terminal of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the OUT1
terminal of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. n+1 and n+2 indicates the element number succeeding the element number n that
is specified to connect to OUT terminal or the element number specified to connect to OUT2 and OUT3 terminal of MC-2E
and MC-3E blocks.
MV
2
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
For pulsive output signal, the time of ON is set in the column of MC block pulse width on
FCS folder. The default is 1 sec.
Output action
direction
------
MV
n+1 (*1)
n+2 (*1)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
n in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to OUT terminal of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, or the OUT1
terminal of MC-2E and MC-3E blocks. n+1 and n+2 indicates the element number succeeding the element number n that
is specified to connect to OUT terminal or the element number specified to connect to OUT2 and OUT3 terminal of MC-2E
and MC-3E blocks.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-196
MV
Output status of contact 1
(n)
2
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
For pulsive output signal, the time of ON is set in the column of MC block pulse width on
FCS folder. The default is 1 sec.
n Inching Output
Inching/Full-Stroke Time Width
Inching output is a function which drives or stops the motor for a specified duration according
to the manual operation of the operator using the operation and monitoring function.
The inching output is initiated when change the inching output setpoint value (SV). The final
control element is manipulated for a duration (Tout) proportional to the change in SV (SV)
from 0, 50 or 100 % shown below.
After Tout has elapsed, the inching output setpoint value (SV) follows the manipulated output
value (MV) prior to the modification. The inching operation is available only in manual (MAN)
mode.
When the inching operation is not executed, the inching output setpoint value (SV) follows the
manipulated output value (MV).
Table 1.17.3-6 The Relationship Between the Manipulated Output Value (MV) and the Inching Output
Setpoint Value (SV)
MV
SV
0%
50 %
100 %
| SV |
100
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-197
The output reverses from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON only during Tout time.
The inching output only reverses the contact output to the OUT terminal connection destination; the manipulated output value (MV) remains unchanged.
0
MV
SV
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
2
10
100
Tout
10 seconds
90
100
10 seconds
Tout
Figure 1.17.3-5 Inching Output of a 2-Position Status Output (When the Full Stroke Time Width is 100
Seconds)
When MV=2, the output of the contact 1 is reversed for duration of Tout.
When MV=0, the output of the contact 2 is reversed for duration of Tout.
When MV=1, the output of the contact 1 is reversed for duration of Tout if the change in
inching output setpoint value (SV) is positive. The output of the contact 2 is reversed for
duration of Tout if the inching output setpoint value (SV) is negative.
The inching output only reverses the contact output, the manipulated output value (MV) remains unchanged.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-198
MV
SV
10
1
0
50
40
50
60
50
100
90
100
ON
Contact 1
Direct
action
Contact 2
Contact 1
Reverse
action
Contact 2
OFF
10 seconds
(Tout)
ON
OFF
10 seconds
(Tout)
10 seconds
(Tout)
10 seconds
(Tout)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Reversed
Connection
Direct action
Reversed?
Connection
Reversed action
Contact 1
Contact 2
Contact 1
Contact 2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Figure 1.17.3-6 Inching Output of a 3-Position Status Output (When the Full Stroke Time Width is 100
Seconds)
When MV=2, performs pulsive output from the contact 2, then performs again from contact 1 after Tout has elapsed.
When MV=0, performs pulsive output from the contact 1, then performs again from contact 2 after Tout has elapsed.
The inching output only executes the pulsive output from the contact and the manipulated output value (MV) is not changed.
0
MV
SV
Contact 1
Contact 2
%
ON
OFF
ON
10
10 seconds
(Tout)
100
90
100
10 seconds
(Tout)
OFF
Figure 1.17.3-7 Inching Output of a 2-Position Pulsive Output (When the Full Stroke Time Width is 100
Seconds)
When MV=2, performs pulsive output from the contact 3, then performs again from contact 1 after Tout has elapsed.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-199
When MV=0, performs pulsive output from the contact 3, then performs again from contact 2 after Tout has elapsed.
When MV=1, if the sign for the change in inching output setpoint (SV) is positive, pulsive
output is performed from contact 1, then again from contact 3 after Tout has elapsed. If
the sign for the change in inching output setpoint (SV) is negative, pulsive output is performed from contact 2, then again from contact 3 after Tout has elapsed.
The inching output only executes the pulsive output from the contact and the manipulated output value (MV) is not changed.
0
MV
SV
10
1
0
50
40
50
2
60
50
100
90
100
Contact 1
10
seconds
Contact 2
10
seconds
10
seconds
10
seconds
Contact 3
Figure 1.17.3-8 Inching Output of a 3-Position Pulsive Output (When the Full Stroke Time Width is 100
Seconds)
When CSV is changed by a sequence table or by a function block, whether the MV of motor
controller block to instantaneously follow the CSV change or to follow the change at the next
execution time can be specified.
On the Constant tab of FCS Properties sheet, if the option of [MV of Switch Instrument/MC
Instrument follows its CSV change] is checked, the MV will follow the CSV right after the CSV
is changed. Otherwise, the MV will follow the CSV at the next execution time of the motor
controller block. By default, this option is not checked.
Moreover, the option is valid not only for changing the CSV by sequence table blocks, but also valid for changing the CSV by the logic chart blocks, calculation blocks as well as manipulating the CSV on an HIS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-200
Actual Output
CSV=2
CSV=0
MV=2
MV=0
ON
OFF
CSV=2 is set in the
sequence table.
Figure 1.17.3-9 CSV, MV and Actual Output when the Option is Checked: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
Actual Output
CSV=2
CSV=0
MV=2
MV=0
ON
OFF
CSV=2 is set in the
sequence table.
Figure 1.17.3-10 CSV, MV and Actual Output when the Option is Unchecked: FFCS Series/KFCS2/
LFCS2
n Remote/Local Input
The remote/local input function reads the status of on-site push button switches installed near
the equipment such as valves and pumps, and to prevent the output from the motor control
block since the on-site operation is given higher priority when the system is in the local mode.
The remote/local input signal is fed through the TSI terminal of the motor control block. In addition to the contact input, internal switches can be used as signal input too. The remote/local
input signal is stored in the tracking switch (TSW).
Table 1.17.3-7 Relationship Between the Remote/Local Input Signal and the Tracking Switch
Input signal (*1)
Remote/Local
TSW
Mode
OFF (0)
Remote
ON (1)
Local
TRK
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-201
When the TSI terminal is not connected, the data can be set directly to the tracking switch
(TSW) from other function blocks. When TSW is 1, the block mode is set to the on-site manual mode (TRK). When TSW becomes 0, the mode returns to the normal mode (MAN, AUT,
CAS or ROUT) from the on-site manual (TRK) mode.
The action of the remote/local input function in the on-site manual (TRK) mode is as follows:
The output action (output signal conversion) is not executed. But the output action is carried out when the answer back tracking is defined in the status output.
The answer back check is not performed because the answer back error alarm (ANS+,
ANS-) is reset.
n Answerback Tracking
Answerback Tracking
The answerback tracking is to force the manipulated output value (MV) to match the answerback input value (PV), when the block is in Filed-Manual (TRK) mode or when the bypass
command switch (BPSW) is 4 (out-of-service command).
The answerback tracking is defined in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Answerback Tracking: Select either Yes or No.
Default is Yes.
Answerback Error Triggered Fallback is a function that forces the block into MAN mode and
forces the blocks manipulated output (MV) into a designated value whenever answerback
signals indicate an error.
Triggers of Fallback may be selected from one of the three errors shown as below.
Answerback error occurred due to abnormality of either ON (ANS+) or OFF (ANS-) signal.
When fallback is activated, the manipulated output (MV) will be forced to the output position
designated in the builder item [Output when interlock status is true]. At the same time, the interlock alarm (INT) will be initiated right after the output (MV) changed to the designated position.
Once the manipulated output (MV) is manually changed, the interlock alarm (INT) will be deactivated.
If answerback check is not activated, the fallback will not be triggered by answerback error.
The interlock alarm (INT) subsequent to the fallback can be dissolved when any of the following conditions establishes.
When the answerback input signal (PV) is switched to calibration (CAL) mode.
1-202
If the block is in simulation (SIM) status, the fallback will not be triggered by answerback error.
The interlock alarm (INT) subsequent to the fallback will be dissolved right after the block
changes simulation (SIM) status.
When a 2-position status output encounters the answerback error triggered fallback, its behavior is shown in the following illustrate.
MAN fallback starts according to the setting for fallback
triggered by the answerback error.
MV is forced to the designated value for interlock and
the interlock alarm (INT) occurs.
PV
When MV is manipulated,
the INT alarm will be dissolved.
2
0
2
0
Block
mode
AUT
Block
status
NR
Alarm
status
MAN
ANCK
NR
NR
INT
A
N
C
K
NR
NR
ANS+
When a 3-position status output encounters the answerback error triggered fallback, its behavior is shown in the following illustrate.
MAN fallback starts according to the setting for fallback
triggered by the answerback error.
MV is forced to the designated value for interlock and
the interlock alarm (INT) occurs.
MV
2
1
0
PV
2
1
0
Block
mode
Block
status
Alarm
status
When MV is manipulated,
the INT alarm will be dissolved.
AUT
N
R
ANCK
MAN
N
R
A
N
C
K
NR
A
N
C
K
NR
INT
ANS+
Since MV is manipulated,
the ANS+ alarm will be dissolved.
NR
NR
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-203
SEE
ALSO
Setting the answerback triggers for fallback may be performed on the Function Block Detail
Builder.
n Interlock Check
The interlock check is used to place the motor control blocks in the interlock state according
to the operation interlock input signal that is input to the IL terminal of the motor control
blocks.
IMPORTANT
The interlock check function does not operate under the following conditions:
The Interlock Input Signal Direction determines whether the interlock state is activated by
ON or OFF of the operation interlock input signal. An internal switch or contact output can be
used as the operation interlock input signal in addition to the contact input.
The Interlock Input Signal Direction may be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Interlock Input Signal Direction: Choose [Direct] or [Reverse]
The default is [Direct].
If [Direct] is selected, the interlock status is activated when the interlock signal is ON.
If [Reverse] is selected, the interlock status is activated when the interlock signal is OFF.
IMPORTANT
When the signal connected to IL terminal becomes abnormal (i.e., data status becomes
BAD), the block will be released from interlocked status regardless if the action is Direct or
Reverse.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-204
Output when interlock status is true, Modify pulsive output when interlock status true, Hold output
when interlocked
When the motor control block is interlocked, the previous manipulated output value (MV) can
be held. This option can be set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Hold Output when Interlocked : Choose [Valid] or [Invalid]
The default is [Invalid].
If [Valid] is selected, the block will hold the previous output when interlocked.
If [Invalid] is selected, the block will change the output according to the failsafe output specified in the setting of [Output when interlock status is true].
The Hold Output When Interlocked option can be set to the following motor control blocks:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-205
IMPORTANT
If the Hold Output When Interlocked option is selected, note the followings:
SEE
ALSO
When the motor control block falls back due to answerback error or thermo-trip alarm occurrence, the block cannot hold the previous output changes to the failsafe output specified in the setting item of [Output when interlock status is true].
When the block is interlocked, inching action will result in an error and triggers an error
message.
When the block is holding the previous manipulated output value (MV), if the operator
changes the MV, the MV will revert to the held value at the next scan.
When the block is holding the previous manipulated output value (MV), if the block is
changed to local mode, the held MV will no longer valid since the local operation takes
higher preference.
When the block is interlocked and holds the previous manipulated output value (MV), the
occurred alarm for indicating the interlocked (INT) status will be kept alive.
For more information about the behavior of the fallback triggered by answerback errors, refer to:
nAnswerback Error Triggered Fallback on page 1-201
n Off-Service Function
The off-service is used to stop the output from the MC-2 or MC-3 block via a command from
the bypass command switch (BPSW).
Off-service supports the following processes.
The off-service is activated by putting the bypass command switch (BPSW) to 4. When
the off-service command is issued, the block mode is changed to the manual (MAN)
mode and the block status becomes OFF.
When the block changes from service off (O/S) mode to MAN, AUT or CAS mode.
When the I/O module connected to the output terminals recovered from failure.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-206
TIP The output tracking of MC-2 or MC-3 block starts under the following circumstances:
When the block changes from service off (O/S) mode to MAN, AUT or CAS mode.
When the I/O module connected to the output terminals recovers from failure.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.17.4
1-207
The following lists the alarm checks performed by the motor control blocks which are specific
to these four function blocks.
The input high limit and low limit alarm check in the motor control blocks is used for checking
the feedback input.
By means of this feedback input high limit and low limit alarm check, when the feedback input
value (FV) exceeds the feedback input high limit alarm setpoint (PH), a feedback input high
limit alarm (HI) is generated. Also, when the feedback input value (FV) drops below the feedback input low limit alarm setpoint (PL), a feedback input low limit alarm (LO) is generated.
When an alarm has occurred, if the feedback input value (FV) drops lower than the value of
the feedback input high limit alarm setpoint (PH) minus the input high and low limit alarm hysteresis (HYS), the feedback input high limit alarm (HI) is returned to normal state. Also, if the
feedback input value (FV) exceeds the feedback input low limit alarm setpoint (PL) plus the
input high and low limit alarm hysteresis (HYS), the feedback input low limit alarm (LO) is returned to normal state.
FV
PH
HYS
PL
HYS
Time
HI
LO
Figure 1.17.4-1 Actions of the Feedback Input High and Low Limit Alarm Check
Moreover, when the block is in the status that the answerback check is masked (ANCK), the
feedback input high-limit alarm (HI) and the feedback input low-limit alarm (LO) are also
masked.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-208
Engineering unit data within the range of 0 to FV scale span, or percentage data for the FV scale span
When specifying percentage data, add % after the numeric value.
The default is 2.0 %.
IMPORTANT
When the signal connected to TT terminal becomes abnormal (i.e., data status becomes
BAD), if the block is in alarm status, the alarm status of the block will be released.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the interlock status of the motor control blocks, refer to:
nInterlock Check on page 1-203
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the answerback error triggered fallback, refer to:
nAnswerback Error Triggered Fallback on page 1-201
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-209
When IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal of M2-CE or M3-CE block are connected to FF faceplate blocks or fieldbus function blocks, the simultaneity of the two inputs is not guaranteed. If
the both the ON and OFF answerbacks exist at the same time even for a very short time, the
Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm (PERR) may occur. To prevent the alarm occurring under
this circumstance, the alarm can be masked by stop the alarm check for a certain time period
(Mask Time) after the manipulated output (MV) changes. The data item MTM can be used for
setting this answer-back inconsistency alarm mask time.
For MC-2E and MC-3E block, the answer-back inconsistency alarm mask can be set on the
function block detail builder.
Inhibit Answerback Error Alarm: Choose [No] or [Yes].
The default setting is [Yes].
TIP Regarding to answer-backs of MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, since the simultaneity of the two inputs are guaranteed, the Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm Mask becomes unnecessary.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-210
1.18
The Ratio Set Block (RATIO) outputs its manipulated output value (MV) follows the change of
process variable (PV) times the ratio set value. This block is used to set a specific ratio at
which two controlled variables are maintained.
The RATIO Block defines a ratio for control of two control amounts. The figure below shows
the RATIO Block diagram.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Ratio Set Block (RATIO):
SET
CSV
TIN
IN
Input
processing
AUT
MAN
PV
INT
(TSW)
CAS
RSV
TSI
SV
RCAS
CAS/AUT
Control computation
(ratio computation)
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
(PV, PV, MV, MV)
RMV
SUB
The figure below shows the internal control computation processing of the Ratio Set Block
(RATIO):
Control computation
CSV
Setpoint value
pushback
Setpoint
value limiter
SV
Ratio
tracking
RSV
Setpoint value
ramp action
MAN
PV
Ratio computation
KR SVe PV+BIAS
CALC
AUT
CAS
RCAS
Output
processing
MV
ROUT
The figure below shows an example of using the Ratio Set Block (RATIO):
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-211
RATIO
OUT
rF1
SET
F1
IN
PID
OUT
F2
In this control loop, the flowrates F1 and F2 are maintained in a specific ratio r, by setting the
value of F1 multiplied by r, or rF1, as the setpoint value of F2.
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Ratio Set Block (RATIO):
Table 1.18-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Ratio Set Block
(RATIO)
I/O terminal
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
Measurement input
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-212
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the RATIO block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Ratio computation
Bumpless switching
Ratio tracking
Bumpless switching
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the
initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.
Control hold
Temporarily suspends the control action while maintaining the current block mode. During control hold, the output action is performed normally.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-213
Description
AUT fallback
Computer failure
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function
blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
n Ratio Computation
In ratio computation, the following computation processing is performed to obtain a calculated
output value (CALC) by multiplying the process variable (PV) by the effective ratio setpoint
value (SVe):
CALCn=KR SVe PVn+BIAS (1)
CALCn : Current calculated output value
PVn
SVe
KR
: Ratio gain
BIAS
: Bias value
The effective ratio setpoint value (SVe) is a ratio setpoint value (SV) that has been processed
via the setpoint value ramp action to be used for bumpless switching of block modes.
In any automatic operating mode (AUT, CAS or RCAS), the calculated output value (CALC)
receives output signal processing and is set as the manipulated output value (MV).
SV Range
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the ratio setpoint value (SV) range:
Ratio Gain
Ratio Gain
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the ratio gain:
Ratio Gain: Specify a numeric value of 7 digits or less, where the sign and decimal point occupy one digit each.
The default is 1.0.
The expressions to obtain the ratio gain are shown below:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-214
Example 1
The figure below shows an example of operating a flow ratio control system where the
flowrates F1 and F2 range from 0 to 100 m3/h and from 0 to 30 m3/h, respectively, by
maintaining the ratio r between 0.0 and 0.3:
r=0 to 0.3
F1=0 to 100 m3/h
RATIO
F2=0 to 30 m3/h
PID
When the above conditions are applied to the computational expression (1), the flowrate
F1, target flowrate value of F2, and ratio r are represented by the process variable (PV),
calculated output value (CALC) and ratio setpoint value (SV), respectively.
When F1 is 0, the target of F2 is also 0. Thus, set the bias setpoint value (BIAS) of the
computational expression to 0. As a result, the following computational expressions are
satisfied:
CALCn= KRSVePV
KR=
CALCn
SVe PV
(2)
(3)
When r is 0.1 and F1 is 100 m3/h, the target value of F2 is the product of 100 and 0.1, or
10 m3/h. If this condition is applied to the computational expression (3), the following
computational expression is obtained:
CALCn=10, PV=100, SVe=0.1 (SVe=SV)
KR=
10
0.1 100
=1.0
As values of the process variable (PV), calculated output value (CALCn) and effective ratio setpoint value (SVe) are all engineering unit data, this computational expression indicates that the ratio gain (KR) becomes 1.0, if the process variable (PV) and calculated
output value (CALCn) are in the same unit and the effective ratio setpoint value (SVe) has
no unit.
Example 2
In the figure Example of Flow Ratio Control, assume that the flow ratio control system
provides the flowrates F1 and F2 that range from 0 to 300 m3/h and from 0 to 100 /min.,
respectively, and is operated at the ratio r of between 0.0 and 2.0 %.
When F1 is 0, the target value of F2 is 0. Thus, set the bias setpoint value (BIAS) to 0
and apply the expression (3) in Example 1.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-215
When the assumed setting of r is 1.0 % and F1 is 300 m3/h, the target value of F2 is the
product of 300 and 1.0/100, or 3 m3/h, which is then converted to 50 /min. When this is
applied to the expression (3), the following computational expression is obtained:
CALCn=50, PV=300, SVe=1.0 (SVe=SV)
KR=
50
1.0 300
=0.1667
As values of the process variable (PV) and calculated output value (CALCn) are engineering
unit data, the ratio gain (KR) does change even when the scale high/low limits of the process
variable (PV) and calculated output value (CALCn) are changed. However, the ratio gain (KR)
must be changed when the engineering unit of the process variable (PV) and calculated output value (CALCn) or that of ratio setpoint value (SV) is changed, as the ratio gain (KR) is calculated based on the unit conversion coefficients of these values. The engineering unit of the
calculated output value (CALCn) is the same as that of the manipulated output value (MV).
Bias Value
Set the bias value.
Set a data value in the same engineering unit as the manipulated output value (MV) and within the range of - (MSH - MSL) to (MSH - MSL). The bias value can be set or changed from
operation and monitoring functions during operation. The default is the MV scale low limit
(MSL).
MSH : MV scale high limit
MSL : MV scale low limit
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint value limiter, refer to:
nSetpoint Value Limiter on page 1-39
IM 33K03E22-50E
RSV
CSV
AUT/MAN
RCAS
1-216
CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
Figure 1.18-5 Relationship among Setpoint Values (SV, CSV and RSV)
The action of the setpoint value pushback varies in accordance with the block mode of the
function block.
Causes the cascade setpoint value (CSV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to agree with the
setpoint value (SV). Even when a data value is set to the setpoint value (SV) from outside the
function block, the same value is automatically set to the cascade setpoint value (CSV) and
remote setpoint value (RSV).
Causes the setpoint value (SV) and remote setpoint value (RSV) to agree with the cascade
setpoint value (CSV).
Causes the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value (CSV) to agree with the remote
setpoint value (RSV).
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value (MV) downstream in cascade without causing the manipulated output value
(MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies with the control output action and block mode
status.
The functions of bumpless switching available with the Ratio Set Block (RATIO) include the
following:
Ratio tracking
Ratio Tracking
Ratio Tracking
The ratio tracking function sets as a ratio setpoint value (SV) the value calculated backwards
from the manipulated output value (MV), when ratio computation is stopped.
Ratio tracking enables bumpless switching of block modes from manual (MAN) to automatic
(AUT).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-217
SV=(MV-BIAS)
1
PV KR
In the initialization manual (IMAN) mode (e.g., when cascade connection to a downstream loop becomes open)
Ratio tracking:
Set Yes or No for each condition of MAN, AUT plus CND or CAS plus CND.
Default
MAN
*1:
The statuses of MAN, AUT and CAS include remote backup modes, such as AUT (ROUT) and AUT (RCAS).
When the block mode is not remote output (ROUT) or out of service (O/S), the remote manipulated output value (RMV) tracks the manipulated output value (MV).
Scan period
Set the ramp constant from operation and monitoring functions as a set parameter.
Ramp constant (RP): Engineering unit data within the SV scale span range.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-218
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
Because the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track
the value at the connected destination, even when the initialization manual (IMAN) mode
changes to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will override the manual
(MAN) mode. Therefore, no actions in the manual (MAN) mode will take place.
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block changes
to that mode only when the initialization condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the
initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition establishes in the following situation:
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destinations data status is communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a switch block (SW-33,
SW-91) and the connection is switched off. (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the manipulated output value (MV) connected destination is a process output, and
a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the module.
When the data status of the input signal at the TIN or TSI terminals becomes invalid
(BAD) in the tracking (TRK) mode while the output signal is not a pulse-width type.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-219
n Control Hold
The control hold is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily
while maintaining the current block mode. Unlike initialization manual, the control output action is performed normally during control hold.
The control hold action takes place when the following conditions are established during automatic operation (AUT, CAS, RCAS or ROUT):
The connected destination of the IN terminal is open (i.e., not selected via a selector
switch, etc.).
The connected destination of the IN terminal or the connected destination of the data at
the first connected destination is a process input, and the process input is temporarily in a
non-response state (momentary power failure).
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode
regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the process variable (PV) is invalid (BAD) or calibration (CAL).
However, the MAN fallback condition will not be established when the block mode is remote output (ROUT) excluding any of the compound modes during computer backup.
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the module has been changed via maintenance.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-220
n AUT Fallback
The AUT fallback is an error processing function that switches the block mode from cascade
(CAS) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is established, and switches the
control action to the one that uses values set by the operator.
n Computer Fail
When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote cascade (RCAS) mode or remote output (ROUT) mode temporarily and switches to the computer
backup mode.
When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT or CAS to RCAS or ROUT is sent
while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer
backup mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
The transient state mode is a compound block mode consisting of the block mode before
the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS and a remote mode
(RCAS, ROUT).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-221
2.
Then the function block tests the computer condition in the first scan after the block mode
change command and switches to the computer backup mode.
The computer backup mode is a compound block mode consisting of the backup mode
set via the Function Block Detail Builder (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS,
ROUT).
3.
If the computer recovers while the function block is in the computer backup mode, the
block mode changes to remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).
The computer fail condition is a block-mode transition condition used to suspend actions in
the remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT) mode and switches the mode to the
computer backup mode.
A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function blocks to define the remote cascade (RCAS) or
remote output (ROUT) mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has
failed or recovered. The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table
or other function blocks.
Switching to a computer backup mode does not take effect if the backup switch (BSW) is on a
block mode other than remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).
The following example shows when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the
computer backup mode:
RCAS
Computer fails
AUT
(RCAS)
Computer recovers
RCAS
An example when the manual (MAN) mode has been specified for the computer backup
mode is shown as follows:
AUT
ROUT command
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the computer backup mode for each function
block.
1-222
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT, CAS,
RCAS or ROUT mode) becomes invalid.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Process variable
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
CSV
RSV
(*3)
SSL
SSL
(*5)
SSL
MV
(*6)
MSL
RMV
(*7)
MSL
CALC
MSL
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
VL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
PVP
Velocity-Reference Sample
-----
*1:
x
(*4)
1-223
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
BIAS
Bias value
MSL to MSH
MSL
RP
Ramp constant
0 to (SSH - SSL)
SSH - SSL
KR
Ratio gain
-----
1.000
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
Data Item
*1:
*2:
SEE
ALSO
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
For more information about valid block modes of the RATIO block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-224
1.19
The 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) outputs the time function signals according to the
specified line segment graph against time-axis. Using the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PGL13) in combination with controller blocks enables program control of processes.
Specify the time function signal output of the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) indicated
in a line-segment pattern. A program pattern of up to 166 hours or 166 minutes long can be
set when the time-axis setting unit is minute or second, respectively.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13):
INT
SV
Control computation
(program setting)
CAS
AUT
CALC
Output
processing
MV
OUT
MAN
(Annunciator output)
SUB
Figure 1.19-1 Function Block Diagram of 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13):
Table 1.19-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)
I/O terminal
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Annunciator
output
INT
Interlock
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-225
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the PG-L13
block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Expresses a line-segment pattern of the program with line segments conLine-segment pattern signal gennecting up to 14 coordinates on a plane of time (X axis) and output (Y axeration
is) including starting and end points.
Program set action
Calculates output values during each base period in accordance with the
program set pattern, to obtain a calculated output value (CALC).
Saves or changes the calculated output value (CALC) and elapsed time
(SV) at the end of the program.
Moves along the time axis in accordance with the setting of set parameters (SV, ZONE).
Annunciator output
Turns the annunciator message ON at the end of the program set action.
Converts the manipulated output change (MV) during each control period to an actual manipulated output value (MV). The available control output actions are of positional type only.
Bumpless switching
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This
action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
The 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) performs control computation based on line-segment pattern signal generation. The line-segment pattern used to set programs is expressed
by line segments that connect coordinate points of time and output including the starting and
end points.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-226
Line-Segment Pattern
The line-segment pattern used to set programs is expressed by line segments that connect
up to 14 coordinate points on a plane of time (X axis) and output (Y axis) including the starting
and end points (maximum 13 line segments). The specifications of program-setting line-segment patterns are shown below:
Number of Line-Segments: 1 to 13
Arbitrary line segments can be set on a coordinate plane of time (X axis) and output (Y axis).
If 0 is set to a segment on time axis (X02 to X14), the segment before this axis will be the end
of the time axis and the end of the line segments.
Setting Ranges
Line-segment patterns are set from operation and monitoring functions.
Time-axis breakpoint coordinate (X01 to X14):
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-227
CALC
PH
PL
2
Present value
MH
ML
SV
Remaining intra-zone output low limit : Minimum output value between the current elapsed
(ML)
time and intra-zone time low limit (PL)
In the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, output processing is performed to the calculated output value (CALC) and the result is output as a manipulated output value (MV).
When the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode is changed to manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN), the set action will stop. However, computation data, such as time and
calculated output values, will be stored.
If the block mode is changed back to automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS), the program set action resumes from the stored time.
If breakpoints are partially set in a reverse direction on the time axis (e.g., X01 > X02), the
reversed portion will be ignored. The figure below shows an example of the reversed portion
on the time axis being ignored:
In this example, the original line-segment pattern is represented by a dotted line. However,
the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) only recognizes the pattern represented by the solid line.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-228
The actions performed in the automatic (AUT) mode at the end of the program include the following two types:
In each action, the manipulated output value (MV) is caused to agree with the calculated output value (CALC). Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the program end action.
When program exits: Select Holding PV or Quick Return.
The default is Holding PV.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the bumpless start action, refer to:
nBumpless Switching on page 1-229
n Annunciator Output
When the software annunciator message (%AN) is specified for the output destination of the
annunciator output terminal (SUB), the annunciator message function will be turned ON at the
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-229
end of the program set action. However, the program set block only turns the function ON but
does not reset it. Use a sequence control block, or etc. to reset the alarm.
n Bumpless Switching
Bumpless Start
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value of the downstream block in the cascade loop without causing the manipulated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The type of bumpless switching action varies with the control output action and block mode
status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13) is
bumpless start action.
The bumpless start action prevents the value of the output destination from changing abruptly
when the program set action is started from zero elapsed time (SV) by changing the block
mode from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS).
When the program set action is started from zero elapsed time (SV), the position on time axis
is fast-forwarded until the calculated output value (CALC) agrees with the setpoint value of
the output destination. The range of program pattern in which this agreement point is
searched is specified by the bumpless start zone (ZSTR) and bumpless end zone (ZEND).
If no matching pattern is found in the search range, the program set action is started from the
end point of the last zone that exists inside the search range.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the bumpless start action.
Bumpless Start: Select Yes or No.
The default is Yes.
The bumpless start zone (ZSTR) and bumpless end zone (ZEND) are set from operation and
monitoring functions as set parameters.
Bumpless start zone (ZSTR): Select a value between 1 and 13.
The default is 1.
Bumpless end zone (ZEND): Select a value between 1 and 13.
The default is 1.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-230
Present value of
output destination
ZEND
ZSTR
Fast-forwarding
along the time axis
SV
If two successive mode change commands, one to the manual (MAN) mode and the other to
the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, are issued from a sequence control block, etc.
within a single scan period, bumpless start is not executed. Instead, the program set action is
started from the starting point of the program pattern.
If a mode change command to the automatic (AUT) mode is issued by itself, bumpless start is
executed.
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change the block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block will
switch to that mode only when the initialization condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN).
The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-231
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is a communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and the switch off the cascade connection (i.e., the cascade connection
is open).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
and a failure or output open alarm is detected in module.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the block to manual (MAN) mode regardless
of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
Example)
AUTMAN
MAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the I/O module has been changed via maintenance.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-232
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT or CAS
mode) becomes invalid.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range
Default
-----
O/S(MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
SV
Elapsed time
MV
MSL
CALC
MSL
PH
PL
MH
MSL to MSH
MSL
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
ZONE
Zone number
(*3)
1 to 13
ZSTR
1 to 13
ZEND
1 to 13
X01 to X14
Y01 to Y14
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
x
(*2)
x (*4)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-233
User application ID
SH
Default
-----
SL
-----
MSH
-----
MSL
-----
*4:
Range
0
*2:
*3:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
-----
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about a list of valid block modes of the PG-L13 block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-234
1.20
The term totalizing batch set block is a generic name for the flow-totalizing batch set block
(BSETU-2) and the weight-totalizing batch set block (BSETU-3).
This section describes the functions common to these two function blocks.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the functions specific to the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
1.21, Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) on page 1-265
For more information about the functions specific to the BSETU-3 block, refer to:
1.22, Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) on page 1-275
The control computation processing functions of the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks are the
same. The control computation processing functions possessed by these two function blocks
are as follows:
Batch operation
Initialization manual
MAN fallback
The BSET-2 and BSETU-3 blocks perform a special output signal conversion.
The alarm checks commonly performed by and specific to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks
are as follows:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-235
1.20.1
SEE
ALSO
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-236
1.20.2
The following functions are common to the control computation processing performed by the
BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks.
Batch operation
Initialization manual
MAN fallback
MV
MH
TD
TU
TD
Pre-batch
flowratesetpoint
TW
PRE
ML
0
NCNT
STRT
Block status
ZONE
Totalized
value
Block mode
RSTR
IBCH STUP
0 10 1
0 <
ILST
STDY
3
ERLY
EMST EEMS
8
11
STDY
ILST
MAN
STUP
AUT
MAN
Pre-batch
batch end
alarm
BPRE
BEND
MH:
ML:
PRE:
TU:
TD:
TW:
Batch setpoint
Initial forecast value
Pre-batch setpoint
Leakage predictive value
Pre-batch alarm (early notification)
Batch end alarm (end notification)
The operating status is indicated by the block status and control step. The operating status is
switched via the command switch (SW), emergency stop switch (EMSW) or control step
(ZONE). The commands issued by the command switch (SW) and emergency stop switch
(EMSW) are shown below:
1-237
1: Start
2: Restart
3: Abort
4: Emergency stop
0: Changes to 0 automatically when the command (1 to 4) is acknowledged.
The following section explains the basic operation of the Totalizing Batch Set Blocks at each
control step (ZONE):
1.
2.
3.
IM 33K03E22-50E
4.
1-238
5.
6.
7.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-239
8.
9.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-240
Action
Start
EM-ST
Restart
Reset
Block mode
AUT
AUT
AUT
AUT
MV
MH
TW
ML
0
NCNT
STRT
Block status
ZONE
IBCH STUP
0
10
RSET
STDY
EMST
EEMS
0 <
ILST
Totalized
value
Block mode
RSTR
MAN
STUP
STDY
11
END NCNT
6
ILST
AUT
MAN
Other than by the emergency stop command (SW=4), emergency stop can also be triggered
via the emergency stop switch (EMSW=1).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-241
(M)
(F)
(D)
6
RSET
(B)
IBCH
(C)
STUP
(D)
STDY
(E)
ERLY
(N)
7
(F)
PBCH
END
(H)
(J)
11
(L)
RSTR
(I)
EEMS
(F)
EMST
(M)
(A)
10
STRT
(K)
(G)
NCNT
Legend
ZONE
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
(K)
(L)
(M)
(N)
Block status
Status transition can also be induced by changing the control step. The control step (ZONE)
can be changed from a sequence table or calculation block, but not from the operation and
monitoring functions. Note that change commands issued by the command switch (SW) precede any operation to change the control step (ZONE).
The totalized value (SUM) is added to the cumulative totalized value (SUM1) when batch end
processing is completed.
n Manual Operation
When the block mode changes to manual (MAN), automatic control processing is suspended
and manual operation is enabled. The control step changes even during the manual (MAN)
mode. When the block mode is changed from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT) during manual operation, automatic control is started.
n Automatic Prediction
When batch end is detected during each scan period, a flowrate error equivalent to a maximum of one scan period may generate. The Totalizing Batch Set Blocks automatically predicts batch end in order to minimize this error.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-242
When the alarm status changes to pre-batch alarm (BPRE), the totalized value during the
next scan is predicted based on the totalized value increase during the current scan period
(totalized value during the current scan-totalized value during the previous scan). If the predicted value exceeds the batch setpoint (BSET), a duration of time to keep the valve fully
open is calculated in 25 msec. units, based on the totalized value (SUM). The valve is fully
opened when the time calculated using this formula elapses.
The automatic prediction function is executed only in ZONE5. This function is also activated
for outputs via a switch instrument block.
When a Restart command is applied while the block is in the status of emergency stop (Block
Status: EEMS), the block will move to the control step ZONE11 (Block Status: RSTR) first,
and then move to the setup step ZONE2 (Block Status: STUP). At this step, the output will
ramp up. However, the ramp-up begins from the low flow rate setpoint (ML) or from 0 %
needs to be defined.
This option can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart: Choose [Yes] or [No]
The default is [No].
If [Yes] is selected, upon the restart command, the ramp-up of the manipulated output value
(MV) will begin from the low flowrate setpoint (ML). The setup step (Block Status: STUP) will
be the same as before but the ramp-up time (TU) will be the time of the manipulated output
value (MV) ramps from the low flowrate setpoint (ML) to the high flowrate setpoint (MH).
The batch operation will act as follows if Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart is applied.
TU
MV
TD
TU
MH
Pre-Batch
Flowrate
Setpoint
Ramp Up
from ML
PRE
ML
0
NCNT
STRT
Block status
ZONE
RSTR
IBCH STUP
0
10
STDY
EMST
EEMS
STUP
STDY
11
If [No] is selected, upon the restart command, the ramp-up of the manipulated output value
(MV) will begin from the 0 % of flowrate. The manipulated output value (MV) ramps from the 0
% flowrate to the high flowrate setpoint (MH) at the same ramp rate specified by ramp-up time
(TU).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-243
The batch operation will act as follows if Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart is not applied.
TU
MV
TD
TU
MH
Pre-Batch
Flowrate
Setpoint
Ramp Up
from 0 %
PRE
ML
0
NCNT
STRT
Block status
ZONE
RSTR
IBCH STUP
0
10
STDY
STUP
EMST EEMS
STDY
11
If the initial forecast value (ILST) is 0, the ramp-up beginning point can be specified upon the
timing of the start command and the timing that the connected function block becomes a cascade loop. The ramp-up begins from the low flow rate setpoint (ML) or from 0 % needs to be
defined.
This option can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. The setting of Ramp Up from
ML Upon Start/Restart also functions for this purpose.
Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart: Choose [Yes] or [No]
The default is [No].
If [Yes] is selected, upon the start command, the block will not move to initial batch status
(Block Status: IBCH) but directly to go to setup step (Block Status: STUP). The ramp-up of the
manipulated output value (MV) will begin from the low flowrate setpoint (ML). The ramp-up
time (TU) will be the time of the manipulated output value (MV) ramps from the low flowrate
setpoint (ML) to the high flowrate setpoint (MH).
The batch operation will act as follows if Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart is applied.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-244
TU
MV
MH
Pre-Batch
Flowrate
Setpoint
Ramp Up
from ML
PRE
ML
0
STRT
Block status
NCNT
ZONE
IBCH
STUP
10
STDY
If [No] is selected, upon the start command, the block will not move to initial batch status
(Block Status: IBCH) but directly to go to setup step (Block Status: STUP). The ramp-up of the
manipulated output value (MV) will begin from the 0 % flowrate. The manipulated output value
(MV) ramps from the 0 % flowrate to the high flowrate setpoint (MH) at the same ramp rate
specified by ramp-up time (TU).
The batch operation will act as follows if Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart is not applied.
TU
MV
MH
Pre-Batch
Flowrate
Setpoint
Ramp Up
from 0 %
PRE
ML
0
STRT
Block status
NCNT
ZONE
IBCH
STUP
10
STDY
3
However, if the initial forecast value (ILST) is greater than 0 and the block moves to initial
batch status (Block Status: IBCH) before ramp-up, the manipulated output value (MV) ramps
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-245
from the low flowrate setpoint (ML) to the high flowrate setpoint (MH) regardless what is
specified for Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart.
0 % to 49.9 %
50 % to 100 %
Contact output
OFF
ON
Switch instrument
MV=0
MV=2
IMPORTANT
When a BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 function block is applied with two-position ON/OFF output, the
parameters of the ramp up time (TU) and the ramp down time (TD) should be set to zero.
If the ramp down time (TD) is not zero, when the function block runs emergency shutdown to
force MV to 0 %, but the control calculation will ramp down the MV slowly based on the setting value of TD. Since the ON/OFF output only acts in accordance with 100 % MV or 0 %
MV, thus, the output cannot become OFF if the MV is not ramping down to zero but hooked at
100 %. Consequently, the valve cannot be closed by the emergency shutdown (EMST) action.
The same phenomenon occurs when the ramp up time (TU) is not zero. In setup mode of the
function block, the MV may be hooked at 0 % and the valve cannot be opened.
When the connected switch instrument is in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSETU-2 and
BSETU-3 blocks output the manipulated output value (MV) to the sequence setpoint value
(CSV) of the switch instrument, and the switch instrument outputs the received sequence setpoint value (CSV) as its own manipulated output value (MV). In the case of emergency stop,
the manipulated output value (MV) drops to 0 % immediately.
The figure below shows an example of simple batch operation based on the 2-position
ON/OFF output method, when the switch instrument is in the cascade (CAS) mode.
In this example, the parameters are set as follows:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-246
2-position
ON/OFF
TW
Block
status
ZONE
NCNT STRT
0
10
0
Totalized
value
Block
mode
IBCH
STDY
<ILST
EEMS RSTR
9
STDY
11
END NCNT
BSET - LPV
BSET - PLST
ILST
MAN
PBCH
AUT
MAN
Pre-batch
batch end
alarm
BPRE
BEND
Figure 1.20.2-8 Example of Simple Batch Operation Using 2-Position ON/OFF Output Method when the
Both Switch Instruments are in Cascade (CAS) Mode
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the switch instrument block, refer to:
2.4, Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block in the Function Blocks Reference
Vol.2 (IM 33K03E23-50E)
0 % to 24.9 %
25 % to 74.9 %
75 % to 100 %
Contact output 1
OFF
OFF
ON
Contact output 2
OFF
ON
ON
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-247
0 % to 24.9 %
25 % to 74.9 %
75 % to 100 %
Switch instrument 1
MV=0
MV=0
MV=2
Switch instrument 2
MV=0
MV=2
MV=2
IMPORTANT
When a BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 function block is applied with three-position ON/OFF output,
the parameters of the ramp up time (TU) and the ramp down time (TD) should be set to zero.
If the ramp down time (TD) is not zero, when the function block runs emergency shutdown to
force MV to 0 %, but the control calculation will ramp down the MV slowly based on the setting value of TD. Since the ON/OFF output only acts in accordance with 100 % MV, 50 % MV
or 0 % MV, thus, the output cannot become OFF if the MV is not ramping down to zero but
hooked at 100 %. (or 50 %.) Consequently, the valve cannot be closed by the emergency
shutdown (EMST) action.
The same phenomenon occurs when the ramp up time (TU) is not zero. In setup mode of the
function block, the MV may be hooked at 0 % and the valve cannot be opened.
When both of the connected switch instruments are in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 blocks output two manipulated output values (MV) to the corresponding sequence setpoint values (CSV) of switch instruments 1 and 2, and each switch instrument outputs the received sequence setpoint value (CSV) as its own manipulated output value (MV).
In the case of emergency stop, the manipulated output value (MV) drops to 0 % immediately.
The figure below shows an example of simple batch operation based on the three-position
ON/OFF output method, when the switch instruments are in the cascade (CAS) mode. In this
example, the parameters are set as follows:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-248
3-position
ON/OFF
TW
Block
status
ZONE
NCNT STRT
0
10
0
Totalized
value
Block
mode
IBCH
STDY
EEMS RSTR
9
<ILST
STDY
11
PBCH
BSET-PLST
ILST
MAN
END NCNT
0
BSET-LPV
AUT
MAN
Pre-batch
batch end
alarm
BPRE
BEND
Figure 1.20.2-9 Example of Simple Batch Operation Based on 3-Position ON/OFF Output Method when
Both Switch Instruments are in the Cascade (CAS) Mode
50 %
0 %
BSETU-2/
BSETU-3
ZONE
CAS
CAS
0
Figure 1.20.2-10 Example of Batch Operation when Only Switch Instrument 2 is in Cascade (CAS)
Mode
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-249
pre-batch (ZONE5) modes. Therefore, if the manipulated output value (MV) of switch instrument 2 is 0, the emergency stop mode (ZONE9) becomes active.
To perform output in this state, set either of the following:
This eliminates the mode of ZONE1 or 5 and sets the command switch (SW) to 2 (restart
specification). As a result, the control step changes to ZONE3 and batch operation resumes.
The figure below shows an example of simple batch operation based on the three-position
ON/OFF output method, when only switch instrument 1 is in the cascade (CAS) mode:
MV
100 %
50 %
0%
BSETU-2/
BSETU-3
ZONE
CAS
0
CAS
0
Figure 1.20.2-11 Example of Batch Operation when Only Switch Instrument 1 is in Cascade (CAS)
Mode
The batch operation can be set to the emergency stop state when an alarm occurs. Emergency stop execution can be specified for the alarms indicated below:
1-250
The setting for whether the batch operation comes to an emergency stop or continues when
an alarm occurs is performed for each alarm using the Function Block Detail Builder. The
setting selections are Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the operation performs an emergency stop when an alarm occurs. When No is selected, there is no emergency stop and
the batch operation continues. Default settings are given below:
SEE
ALSO
*1:
*2:
The missing pulse alarm (NPLS) is available only for BSETU-2, but not for BSETU-3.
Emergency Stop When Missing Pulse is available only for BSETU-2, but not for BSETU-3.
For more information about the input open, input low-low limit, input high limit and input low limit alarms, refer
to:
5.1, Input Open Alarm Check in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
5.3, Input High-High and Low-Low Limit Alarm Check in the Function Blocks Overview (IM
33K03E21-50E)
5.4, Input High and Low Limit Alarm Check in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the missing pulse alarm, refer to:
nMissing Pulse Alarm Check on page 1-268
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
Because the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track
the value at the connected destination, even when the initialization manual (IMAN) mode is
changed to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will precede the manual
(MAN) mode and any operation to change to the manual (MAN) mode will become invalid.
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change a block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block will
switch to that mode only when the initialization condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the
initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
1-251
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is a communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and the switches off the cascade connection.
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
and a failure or output open alarm is detected in the process output.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established. In the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2), the emergency stop action triggered by an input open alarm will override the MAN fallback action only when input
open emergency stop is defined Yes in the function block builder. When an input open alarm
occurs, the emergency stop (EMST) mode becomes active and the manipulated output value
(MV) drops to the manipulated output scale low limit (MSL).
Once the emergency stop action is completed, the MAN fallback action is executed and the
block mode changes to manual (MAN) mode.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the block to manual (MAN) mode regardless
of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situations:
When the data status of the process variable (PV) is invalid (BAD) or calibration (CAL).
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the I/O module has been changed via maintenance.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-252
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT mode)
becomes invalid.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-253
1.20.3
The BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks perform a special output signal conversion.
This section describes the output signal conversion, using the BSETU-2 block as an example.
The types of output signal processing available in the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks are analog output, data set output for other function block, subsystem output, and 2-position/3-position ON/OFF output. Pulse width output is not available.
Not only the process I/O contact output but also Switch Instrument blocks can be used as the
destination of 2-position/3-position ON/OFF output.
The following list shows the Switch Instrument block that may be connected to BSETU-2 and
BSETU-3. Switch Instrument block with two status output can not be connected.
SIO-11, SIO-11E
SIO-21, SIO-21E
SO-1, SO-1E
IMPORTANT
When a BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 function block is applied with two-position ON/OFF output or
three-position ON/OFF output, the parameters of the ramp up time (TU) and the ramp down
time (TD) should be set to zero.
If the ramp down time (TD) is not zero, when the function block runs emergency shutdown to
force MV to 0 %, but the control calculation will ramp down the MV slowly based on the setting value of TD. Since the ON/OFF output only acts in accordance with 100 % MV, 50 % MV
or 0 % MV, thus, the output cannot become OFF if the MV is not ramping down to zero but
hooked at 100 %. (or 50 %.) Consequently, the valve cannot be closed by the emergency
shutdown (EMST) action.
The same phenomenon occurs when the ramp up time (TU) is not zero. In setup mode of the
function block, the MV may be hooked at 0 % and the valve cannot be opened.
BSETU-2
OUT
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-254
The following table shows the relationship between the manipulated output value (MV) in the
manual operating mode and the contact output status:
Table 1.20.3-1 Relationship between the MV and the Contact Output Status in Manual Mode
MV value
0 to 49.9 %
50 to 100 %
Contact output
OFF
ON
MV
100
2-position
ON/OFF
0
Figure 1.20.3-2 Simplified Batch Operation of the 2-Position ON/OFF Output System
IN
OUT
OUT2
The following table shows the relationship between the manipulated output value (MV) in the
manual operating mode and the contact outputs status:
Table 1.20.3-2 Relationship between the MV and the Contact Output Status in Manual Mode
MV value
0 to 24.9 %
25 to 74.9 %
75 to 100 %
Contact output 1
OFF
OFF
ON
Contact output 2
OFF
ON
ON
MV
100
3-position
ON/OFF
0
1-255
BSETU-2
OUT
IN
CSV
OUT
SIO-11
The following table shows the relationship between the manipulated output value (MV) in the
manual operating mode and the switch instrument status:
Table 1.20.3-3 Relationship between the MV of 2-Position ON/OFF Block and the MV of the Switch Instrument Block
MV value
0 to 49.9 %
50 to 100 %
Switching instrument
MV=0
MV=2
When the connected switch instrument is in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSETU-2 block
outputs a manipulated output value (MV) to the sequence setpoint value (CSV) of the switch
instrument, and the instrument will output the sequence setpoint value (CSV) as its own manipulated output value (MV). If the switch instrument is not in the cascade (CAS) mode, the
BSETU-2 block will be in the initialization manual mode (IMAN). Then, the switch instrument
manipulated output value (MV) converted to the manipulated output value (MV) data of the
BSETU-2 block will be set as the manipulated output value (MV) of the BSETU-2 by the output tracking function. Even when connected to a switch instrument block, the automatic prediction is still functioning to close the valve.
OUT
BSETU-2
OUT2
CSV
SO-1
OUT
CSV
OUT
SO-1
The following table shows the relationship between the manipulated output value (MV) in the
manual operating mode and the switch instrument status:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-256
Table 1.20.3-4 Relationship between the MV of 3-Position ON/OFF Block and the MV of the Switch Instrument Block
MV value
0 to 24.9 %
25 to 74.9 %
75 to 100 %
Switching instrument 1
MV=0
MV=0
MV=2
Switching instrument 2
MV=0
MV=2
MV=2
When both of the connected switch instruments are in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSETU-2 block outputs two manipulated output values (MV) to the sequence setpoint values
(CSV) of the switch instrument 1 and 2, respectively, and the individual instruments will output
their sequence setpoint value (CSV)s as their own manipulated output value (MV)s, respectively. If neither of the switch instruments is in the cascade (CAS) mode, the BSETU-2 block
will be in the initialization manual mode (IMAN). Then, the switch instrument manipulated output value (MV) converted to the manipulated output value (MV) data of the BSETU-2 block
will be set as the manipulated output value (MV) of the BSETU-2 by the output tracking function.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.20.4
1-257
The alarm checks commonly performed by and specific to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks
are as follows:
IMPORTANT
The pre-batch alarm and the batch end alarm will be initiated only under the conditions described later in this section.
When checking the BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 running state with sequence table or other blocks,
it is recommended not using the alarm status but using the block status or the zone number.
The pre-batch alarm check is a function that determines if the integral value (SUM) has
reached a value (BSET-PLST) obtained by subtracting the pre-batch setpoint value (PLST)
from the batch setpoint value (BSET).
If it is determined that the integral value (SUM) has reached a value (BSET-PLST) obtained
by subtracting the pre-batch setpoint value (PLST) from the batch setpoint value (BSET), a
pre-batch alarm (BPRE) is activated.
To enable the pre-batch alarm function, set the alarm detect as enabled in the Function
Block Detail Builder.
The pre-batch alarm can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Pre-batch alarm: Choose [Yes] or [No].
Default is [No].
The batch end alarm check is a function that determines if the integral value (SUM) has
reached a value (BSET-LPV) obtained by subtracting the leakage predictive value (LPV) from
the batch setpoint value (BSET).
If it is determined that the integral value (SUM) has reached a value (BSET-LPV) obtained by
subtracting the leakage predictive value (LPV) from the batch setpoint value (BSET), a batch
end alarm (BEND) is generated.
To enable the batch end alarm check, set the alarm detect as enabled in the Function Block
Detail Builder.
The batch end alarm can be set with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Batch End Alarm: Choose [Yes] or [No].
Default is [No].
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-258
The cumulative deviation high and low limit check is a function that determines whether the
deviation (SUM-BSET) between the integral value (SUM) and batch setpoint value (BSET)
falls outside the range of the absolute value of the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint value
(DL).
If it is determined that the deviation exceeds the cumulative deviation alarm setpoint value
(DL) in the positive direction, a cumulative deviation high limit alarm (BDV+) occurs. Similarly,
if it exceeds the DL in the negative direction, a cumulative deviation low limit alarm (BDV-) occurs. These alarms are checked upon batch completion (transits from ZONE7 to ZONE0) and
are maintained as long as the control step is ZONE0 (batch stopped status). However, when
a reset (SW=3) is done, the alarm check is not performed.
To activate the cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm check, set the type of cumulative
deviation high and low limit alarm check and the cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm
check setpoint value (DL).
The type of cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm is set by the cumulative deviation
high and low limit alarm item in the Function Block Detail Builder. The types of cumulative
deviation high and low limit alarms are given below. The default is high and low limit alarm.
No alarm
No detection is performed
When single direction is specified for the cumulative deviation high and low limit alarm type,
only the cumulative deviation high limit alarm is monitored when the cumulative deviation
alarm setpoint (DL) has a plus sign, and only the low limit alarm is monitored when the setpoint has a minus sign.
The cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL) is set by the operation and monitoring function.
The cumulative deviation alarm setpoint (DL) can changed as setting parameters.
The leak alarm check is a function that compares the integral value and the previous integral
value at the time of batch completion (saved when batch is completed) and determines
whether the difference exceeds the leak setpoint value (LK).
If it is determined that the difference exceeds the leak setpoint value (LK), a leak alarm
(LEAK) occurs. Flowrate accumulation is being performed from the time the batch is completed until the next batch starts.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-259
To activate the leak alarm check, set whether the leak alarm check is enabled or disabled and
the leak setpoint value (LEAK).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-260
1.20.5
The Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2 and BSETU-3) are provided with optional compatibilities with the Totalizing Batch Set Units of CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL. The optional compatibilities are as follows:
Actions of manipulated output value (MV) when changing from MAN to AUT mode
These features are available only for FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the batch operation is stopped (Block Status: NCNT) and the block is manual
(MAN) mode, upon the ACT.ON command, as if starting batch operation using the Command Switch to start (SW=1) while the block is in automatic (AUT) mode.
When the batch is running emergency stop (Block Status: EMST) or when the batch is
emergently stopped (Block Status: EEMS), upon the ACT.ON command, as if restarting
batch operation using the Command Switch to restart (SW=2) while the block is in automatic (AUT) mode.
When the batch is running emergency stop (Block Status: EMST) or when the batch is
emergently stopped (Block Status: EEMS), upon the ACT.ON and ZONE.0 commands,
the block will start the batch operation from the beginning instead of restart. However, in
the sequence table, the ACT.ON and ZONE.0 must be scripted in the same scan time.
When the batch is at a status other than the above described status such as batch stop
(NCNT), emergency stop (EMST) or emergency stop complete (EEMS) and the block is
at automatic (AUT) mode, upon the ACT.ON command, no action will be initiated. However, if the block is at manual (MAN) mode, upon the ACT.ON command, the block will shift
to automatic (AUT) mode.
Table 1.20.5-1 Scripts in Sequence Table When Migrating CENTUM V 7BS or CENTUM-XL BSETU
Action
7BS/BSETU
BSETU-2
Remarks
Start
LOOP=AUT, SV=0
Emergency Stop
LOOP=CAS
SW.4 or EMSW.1
Restart
LOOP=AUT
ACT.ON (*1)
IM 33K03E22-50E
7BS/BSETU
LOOP=MAN
BSETU-2
SW.3
1-261
Remarks
For Start, use ACT.ON instead of LOOP=AUT and ZONE.0 instead of SV=0. For Restart, use ACT.ON instead of LOOP=AUT.
Moreover, the control step (ZONE) cannot be changed from HIS, but can be changed from sequence table.
Moreover, from HIS, ACT.ON command cannot be entered. To start a batch from HIS, the operator can change the block into automatic (AUT) mode and use the Command Switch
(SW=1). However, if the optional compatibility is not enabled, the ACT.ON command in the
sequence table cannot change the block and ZONE.
The batch-end (BEND) alarm will be definitely imitated when the block shifts to batch end
status.
If the batch end wait time (TW) is set to 0, the control step will be shifted from ZONE7 of
batch-end (Block Status: END) to ZONE0 of batch-stop (Block Status: NCNT) immediately and the batch-end (BEND) alarm will be initiated.
However, this option is valid only when the setting of [Batch End Alarm] is set to [Yes] on the
Function Block Detail Builder.
SEE
ALSO
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-262
SEE
ALSO
For more information about checking the pre-batch alarm, refer to:
nPre-Batch Alarm Check on page 1-257
When batch is stopped (Block Status: NCNT), if the block is changed to automatic (AUT)
mode, the manipulated output value (MV) will become 0.
However, if the optional compatibility is not enabled, the manipulated output value (MV)
will hold the current value.
When batch is running and in a status other than batch stopped (Block Status: NCNT), if
the block is changed from automatic (AUT) to manual (MAN) mode, and then changed to
automatic (AUT) mode again, the manipulated output value (MV) will ramp up to high
flowrate setpoint (MH) with the specified ramp-up rate for setup step (Block Status:
STUP). When the batch reaches Early status (Block Status: ERLY), the manipulated output value (MV) will ramp down to pre-batch flowrate setpoint (PRE) with the specified
ramp-down rate.
However, if the optional compatibility is not enabled, the manipulated output value (MV)
will change to a value according to its control step (ZONE) while the block is changed
from automatic (AUT) to manual (MAN) mode.
When the block is changed from automatic (AUT) to manual (MAN) mode, the manipulated
output value (MV) will act as follows:
Table 1.20.5-2 Actions of Manipulated Output Value (MV) when Changed from AUT to MAN Mode:
FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
ZONE
Block Status
Optional Compatibility
Disabled (*1)
NCNT
MV=0
IBCH
MV=ML
MV=ML
STUP
MV: Ramps Up
MV: Ramps Up
STDY
MV=MH
ERLY
PBCH
MV=PRE
END
MV=0 (*3)
MV=0 (*3)
EMST
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-263
Block Status
EEMS
Optional Compatibility
Disabled (*1)
MV=0
The table below shows the settings for compatibilities of totalizing batch set block.
Table 1.20.5-3 Settings for Compatibilities of Totalizing Batch Set Block: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
Totalizing Batch Set Block
Setting
[CENTUM-XL Compatible].
When [Compatible with 7BS, BSETU] is selected, the following compatibilities will be applied:
Actions of manipulated output value (MV) when changing from MAN to AUT mode
Actions of manipulated output value (MV) when changing from MAN to AUT mode
*1:
When the option of [Compatible with 7BS, BSETU] or [CENTUM-XL Compatible] is checked, the compatibility is also applied
to the function block when the option of [Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart] is checked on the Function Block Detail builder.
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-264
For more information about [Ramp Up from ML Upon Start/Restart] option, refer to:
nStart Action when Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) and Controller Blocks (such
as PID) in Cascade Loop on page 1-243
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-265
1.21
The Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) totalizes flowrate signals and outputs the manipulated output value in accordance with the totalized value. This block is used for batch
control, such as batch shipment control of products and batch charge control of raw materials.
The Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) totalizes flowrate signals and outputs the manipulated output value (MV) in accordance with the totalized value.
The Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) changes the output to 0 % when the totalized
value reaches the batch setpoint.
The Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) enables batch control, such as batch shipment control of products and batch charge control of raw materials.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2):
ZONE
Input
processing
IN
PV
SW
EMSW
Batch
set pattern
AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
OUT2
MAN
SUM
INT
Figure 1.21-1 Function Block Diagram of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)
BSETU-2
OUT
The figure below shows an example of batch shipment control where flow velocity is PID controlled in combination with other function blocks:
IM 33K03E22-50E
IN
1-266
OUT
SET
PID
IN
OUT
FOUT
RATIO
IN
OUT
RATIO
IN
IN
OUT
SET
IN
BSETU-2
OUT
SET
SET
PI-BLEND OUT
IN
PI-BLEND OUT
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2):
Table 1.21-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Flow-Totalizing
Batch Set Block (BSETU-2)
I/O terminal
*1:
*2:
IN
Measurement input
OUT
Manipulated output
OUT2
Manipulated output
(*2)
INT
Interlock
SW output
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
x
x
x
x
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The OUT2 terminal is used when connecting a 3-position ON/OFF output to switch instruments 1 and 2, for connection to
switch instrument 2.
The OUT terminal outputs the manipulated output signals indicated below:
Analog output
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-267
Contact outputs for 2-position ON/OFF output and 3-position ON/OFF output
Data setting to switch instrument 1 when the 3-position ON/OFF output is connected to
switch instruments 1 and 2.
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the functions common to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks, refer to:
1.20, Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) on page 1-234
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Batch operation
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This
action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
However, the emergency stop action precedes when an input open alarm
has occurred.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-268
SEE
ALSO
Description
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
For more information about the control computation processing of the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
1.20.2, Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) on page 1-236
The missing pulse alarm check is a function that determines whether a pulse input for a set
duration is detected during pulse input detection.
If it is determined that when a pulse input is not detected for the set duration during pulse input detection, a missing pulse alarm (NPLS) is generated. This check is performed during
each missing pulse check time (t3) after the missing pulse check mask interval (t2) has
elapsed and only when the control step is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
The figure below illustrates the timing of the BSETU-2 block alarm check.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-269
PRE
ML
0
Block
status
NCNT
IBCH
STUP
STDY
EMST
EEMS
STUP
STDY
ZONE
LO
HI/LL
NPLS
t1
ERLY PBCH
4
END
7
t1
t1
t1
t2
t2
t3
t1
t2
t3
LO
: Low limit alarm
HI
: High limit alarm
LL
: Low-low limit alarm
NPLS : Missing pulse warning
To activate the missing pulse alarm, set whether the missing pulse alarm check is enabled or
disabled, the missing pulse check mask interval, and the missing pulse check time.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-270
IMPORTANT
For FFCS/FFCS-L/KFCS2/KFCS, if a pulse input signal is sent from an ER bus node, missing
pulse alarm may occur due to the delay of data refresh. Thus, when setting the missing pulse
check time, the data refresh delay from ER bus node should be put into consideration.
Moreover, if the ER bus interface master modules (EB401) of FFCS/FFCS-L/KFCS2/KFCS, or
RIO bus interface modules (RB301) of LFCS2/LFCS are dual-redundantly configured, when
switching from one module to another, the data refresh of pulse input may halt for a few seconds. The missing pulse check time can be set with the following consideration:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the data refresh cycle between the remote node of FFCS/FFCS-L/KFCS2/KFCS
and EB401, refer to:
Data Flow in Process I/O in 7.1.3, Timing of Process I/O in the Function Blocks Overview (IM
33K03E21-50E)
The flowrate checks take place upon expiration of the flowrate check masking interval (t1), as
shown in Figure below. Specify the masking interval with the Function Block Detail Builder.
Flowrate check masking interval: 0 to 10000
Unit is the scan period.
The default is 10.
The flowrate alarm check processing timing of BSETU-2 block is shown below.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-271
PRE
ML
0
Block
status
NCNT
IBCH
STUP
STDY
EMST
EEMS
STUP
STDY
ZONE
LO
HI/LL
t1
t1
ERLY PBCH
4
END
t1
t1
t1
LO
HI
LL
: Low-limit alarm
: High-limit alarm
: Low-low limit alarm
The flowrate alarm check in the BSETU-2 block consists of the low-low limit check and the
high-low limit check.
Low-Limit Alarm
A low-limit alarm (LO) is generated if the flowrate (PV) falls below the low-limit alarm setpoint
(PL). This check operates only in control step 3.
High-Limit Alarm
A high-limit alarm (HI) is generated if the flowrate (PV) exceeds the high-limit alarm setpoint
(PH). This check operates in control steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-272
ZONE(*1)
5
6
10
11
IOP
IOP-
OOP
CNF
LL
HI
LO
BDV +
BDV-
LEAK
NPLS
BPRE
BEND
Alarm
*1:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about operation of the control steps for the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
nBatch Operation (Analog Output) on page 1-236
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
BSTS
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Block status
-----
NCNT
ALRM
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SUM1
SW
Command switch
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
MV
(*4)
MSL
LL
SL to SH
SL
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-273
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
DL
1000
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Table 1.21-5 Data Items of Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-2) (2/2)
Data Item
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
PRE
MSL to MSH
MSL
LPV
ILST
PLST
Pre-batch setpoint
BSET
Batch setpoint
LK
Leak setpoint
100
TU
Up time
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
TD
Down time
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
TW
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
ZONE
Control step
0 to 11
EMSW
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the BSETU-2 block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-274
Level
Symbol
Name
STRT
Batch Start
IBCH
Batch Initialization
STUP
Batch Setup
STDY
Ready
ERLY
Early
PBCH
Pre-Batch
END
Batch End
NCNT
Batch Stopped
RSET
Reset
EMST
Emergency Shutdown
EEMS
RSTR
Restart
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-275
1.22
The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) calculates a totalized value of changes in
weight signals sent from a scale, and outputs the manipulated output value in accordance
with the totalized value. This block is used for batch control, such as batch shipment control of
products and batch charge control of raw materials.
The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) calculates a totalized value of changes in
weight signals sent from the scale, and outputs the specified manipulated output value in accordance with the totalized value.
The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) changes the output to 0 % when the totalized value reaches the batch setpoint.
The Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) enables batch control, such as batch shipment control of products and batch charge control of raw materials.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3):
ZONE
SW
EMSW
IN
IN2
Input
processing
IN3
PV
AUT
Batch
set pattern
Output
processing
MV
OUT2
MAN
IN4
SUM0
OUT
SUM
INT
Figure 1.22-1 Function Block Diagram of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3):
Table 1.22-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
Analog input
IN2
Digital input
IN3
IN4
Ready bit
input
OUT
Manipulated output
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-276
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
I/O terminal
OUT2
INT
*1:
*2:
Manipulated output
(*2)
Interlock
SW input
x
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
The OUT2 terminal is used when connecting a 3-position ON/OFF output to switch instruments 1 and 2, for connection to
switch instrument 2.
Binary or BCD
Ready bit
Status
Preparing data
Read ready
Read ready
Preparing data
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-277
Analog output
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the functions common to the BSETU-2 and BSETU-3 blocks, refer to:
1.20, Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) on page 1-234
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the BSETU-3 block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-278
SEE
ALSO
Description
Batch operation
Initialization manual
Changes the block mode to IMAN to temporarily suspend the control action. This action takes place when the initialization manual condition becomes satisfied.
MAN fallback
Changes the block mode to MAN to forcibly stop the control action. This
action takes place when the MAN fallback condition becomes satisfied.
However, the emergency stop action precedes when an input open alarm
has occurred.
Stops the control action of function blocks currently operating automatically, while disabling the stopped function blocks from changing to the automatic operating mode.
For more information about the control computation processing of the weight-totalizing batch set block (BSETU-3), refer to:
1.20.2, Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3) on page 1-236
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
BSTS
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Block status
-----
NCNT
ALRM
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
SL
RAW
SUM
Totalizer value
SUM0
SUM1
SW
Command switch
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
MV
MSL
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-279
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
DL
1000
*1:
*2:
*3:
Table 1.22-5 Data Items of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) (2/2)
Data Item
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
PRE
MSL to MSH
MSL
LPV
ILST
PLST
Pre-batch setpoint
BSET
Batch setpoint
LK
Leak setpoint
100
TU
Up time
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
TD
Down time
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
TW
0 to 10,000 seconds
0 second
ZONE
Control step
0 to 11
EMSW
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MH
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the BSETU-3 block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-280
Level
Symbol
Name
STRT
Batch Start
IBCH
Batch Initialization
STUP
Batch Setup
STDY
Ready
ERLY
Early
PBCH
Pre-Batch
END
Batch End
NCNT
Batch Stopped
RSET
Reset
EMST
Emergency Shutdown
EEMS
RSTR
Restart
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-281
1.22.1
The input signal conversion specific to the Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3) includes three types of methods: Weight Measurement Conversion, SUM Conversion and
SUM Conversion.
Weight
measurement
conversion
CAL
SUM0
SUM0=
volume unit
conversion factor
SUM conversion
Measurement in the
incremental direction
SUM =
SUM0 - (zero point)
SUM
conversion
SUM
x input data
Measurement in the
decremental direction
SUM =
(zero point) - SUM0
SUM
calculation
Digital
filter
PV
SUM1
SUM1: cumulative integrator value
Figure 1.22.1-1 Block Chart for Input Signal Conversion of Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block (BSETU-3)
As shown in above figure, the combination of input signal conversion includes the following
three types:
SUM Conversion
SUM Conversion
n Weight-Totalizing Conversion
Weight-Totalizing Conversion refers to the processing in which the weight input data read
from a weighing machine are converted into the data in the same unit as the integrator value
(SUM) to obtain the absolute integrator value (SUM0).
The following is the computational expression for the absolute integrator value (SUM0):
SUM0 = quantity unit scale factor input data
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-282
If the weight signal is an analog signal, the input data is the 0 to 100 % data read from the
connection destination.
If the weight signal is data read from the communication input, the input data is the data
after communication input conversion.
If the weight signal is a digital signal, the input data can be obtained as follows:
When the ready bit is Ready to Read, the digital data and its sign bit are read for each
scan period and converted into the same format (double-precision floating-point) as the
absolute integrator value (SUM0) to obtain the input data.
If the ready bit is Not Ready to Read, the data setting for absolute integrator value
(SUM0) is bypassed while the previous value is latched.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about communication input conversion of the weight-totalizing signals, refer to:
Communication Input Conversion in 3.1.1, Input Signal Conversions Common to Regulatory Control
Blocks and Calculation Blocks in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Code Conversion
Code conversion is a function that converts the weight signal digital data read from IN terminal 2 to binary code data. The weight signal digital data that can be read by the BSETU-3
block includes binary codes and binary coded decimal (BCD) codes. Specify No when the
weight signal is a binary code and BCD in the case of BCD code using the Function Block
Detail Builder, together with the number of code contacts.
Code Conversion
Set BCD if the input signal is a binary-coded decimal code (BCD) or No if it is a binary.
The default setting is No conversion.
The input signal is digital type and the ready bit is in the status of Not Ready to Read.
The data status of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is not good (BAD or IOP).
When the weight-totalizing conversion is bypassed, the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is
not to be updated, the previous good value is kept.
n SUM Conversion
Input Change Protrusion Bypass
SUM conversion refers to the processing in which the integrator value (SUM) is obtained by
totalizing the increment or decrement of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) from the batch
start.
The following is the totalization formula for measurement in the incremental or decremental
direction:
The zero point refers to the absolute integrator value (SUM0) when the control step is 10 (initialization processing at batch start).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-283
If the input change exceeds the input velocity limit setting value, it is considered as an abnormal input signal so that the integrator value data setting is not executed and the previous value is held. The data status, however, is not invalid in this case. The input velocity alarm bypass setting is a value indicated by the process variable change in one scan period. The basic scan period is 1 scan per 1 second.
The weight measurement direction specification, input velocity alarm bypass specification,
and the setting value for input velocity limit can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Weighing Direction
Select Increase or Decrease.
The default setting is Increase.
Setting value
Set the value between 0 and 1000 in the same unit as SUM.
The default setting is 1000.
The cumulative integrator value (SUM1) is the accumulation of integrator values at the end of
batch. The cumulative integrator value (SUM1) is obtained at the end of each batch as follows:
SUM1=SUM1 (cumulative integrator value kept at the end of the previous batch) +SUM
Under the following circumstances, the SUM conversion is bypassed.
The input signal is digital type and the ready bit is in the status of Not Ready to Read.
The data status of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is not good (BAD or IOP).
When the SUM conversion is bypassed, the integrator value (SUM) is not to be updated, the
previous good value is kept.
n SUM Conversion
Flow Time Unit
SUM conversion refers to the function in which the integrator value variation in the specified
time unit is passed to the digital filter. The value variation after digital filter processing is the
flow rate (PV). The following is the computational expression for the SUM.
SUM = (process variable change of SUM in one scan period)
The PV time unit and scan period in the above formula are in the unit of second.
The flow measurement time unit can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Flow Time Unit: Select Second, Minute, Hour or Day.
The default setting is Second.
e.g. Select Hour for ton/h and Minute for kg/min.
Under the following circumstances, the input signal processing is bypassed.
The input signal is digital type and the ready bit is in the status of Not Ready to Read.
The data status of the absolute integrator value (SUM0) is not good (BAD or IOP).
In these cases, the flow rate value (PV) is not to be updated, the previous good value is kept.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-284
1.22.2
This section describes the flowrate alarm check, which is one of the alarm checks performed
by the BSETU-3 block and is specific to this function block.
In addition, the BSETU-3 block uses a unique alarm display priority order, which is different
from that of other function blocks.
Low-low limit and high and low-limit checks are made upon expiration of a specified period of
time, as shown in Figure below. The specified period of time is called the flowrate check
masking interval. The checks are made by comparing the SUM change (SUM) for the flowrate check time interval with an alarm setpoint.
Specify the flowrate check masking interval and the flowrate check time interval with the
Function Block Detail Builder.
The flowrate alarm check processing timing of BSETU-3 block is shown below.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-285
PRE
ML
0
Block
status
NCNT
IBCH
STUP
STDY
EMST
EEMS
STUP
STDY
ZONE
LO
HI/LL
t1
ERLY PBCH
4
END
7
t1
t1
t1
t2
t1
t2
LO
HI
LL
: Low-limit alarm
: High-limit alarm
: Low-low limit alarm
The flowrate alarm check in the BSETU-3 block consists of the low-low limit check and the
high-low limit check.
< LL LL alarm
Low-Limit Check
A low-limit alarm (LO) is generated if the value of SUM in the flow check masking interval
converted to a flow measurement falls below the low-limit alarm setpoint (PL). This check is
operable only in control step 3.
SUM x (PV time unit)
(Flowrate check time interval) x (Scan period)
< PL LO alarm
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-286
High-Limit Check
A high-limit alarm (HI) is generated if the value of SUM in the flow check masking interval
converted to a flow measurement exceeds the high-limit alarm setpoint (PH). This check is
operable in control steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
SUM x (PV time unit)
(Flowrate check time interval) x (Scan period)
> PH HI alarm
ZONE(*1)
5
6
10
11
IOP
IOP-
OOP
CNF
LL
HI
LO
BDV +
BDV-
LEAK
BPRE
BEND
Alarm
*1:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the operation of each control step in the BSETU-3 block, refer to:
nBatch Operation (Analog Output) on page 1-236
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-287
1.23
The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) outputs a change per unit time by limiting it within the velocity limits. The Velocity Limiter Block may be applied to the control process that the abrupt
change need to be avoided.
The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) performs control computation processing to the setpoint
signals from other function blocks or setpoint values set by the operator, and outputs a
change per unit time by limiting it within the velocity limits. The velocity limiting processing is
executed in the cascade (CAS) or automatic (AUT) mode.
The Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) reads the abruptly changing manipulated output value
(MV) of other function blocks as a cascade setpoint signal, and outputs its change per scan
period as a manipulated output value (MV) by limiting it within the velocity limits. In the automatic (AUT) mode, the block outputs a change per scan period in the setpoint value (SV) received from outside, such as operation and monitoring functions, as a manipulated output value (MV) by limiting it within the velocity limits. Separate velocity limits may be set for upward
and downward directions.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM):
SET
CSV
RSV
BPSW
INT
CAS
AUT
MAN
SV
RCAS
MAN
Velocity limiting
computation
AUT/CAS
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
(MV, MV)
SUB
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM):
Table 1.23-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Velocity Limiter
Block (VELLIM):
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
SET
Setting input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
INT
Interlock
SW input
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-288
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the VELLIM
block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Performs velocity limiting to the setpoint value (SV) and obtains a manipulated output value (MV).
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL).
Bumpless switching
Bumpless switching
Output pushback
Initialization manual
MAN fallback
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-289
Description
AUT fallback
Computer failure
The deviation alarm check, which is one of the alarm checks performed by the VELLIM
block, is specific to this function block.
SV
MV
MV
Scan period
Scan period
Time
SV Range
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the setpoint value (SV) range:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-290
When the Rate of Setpoint Value Change Is BELOW the Velocity Limits
If the rate of SV change is below the velocity limits, the SV value receives velocity limiting processing and is converted to an MV-range value to be used as an MV.
The computational expression of this velocity limiting computation is shown below:
MVc=
MSH-MSL
SSH-SSL
(SV-SSL)+MSL
MVn = MVc
MVc : Manipulated output computed value
MVn : Manipulated output current value
SSH : SV scale high limit
SSL : SV scale low limit
MSH : MV scale high limit
MSL : MV scale low limit
When the Rate of Setpoint Value Change Is ON or OVER the Velocity Limits
If the rate of SV change is on or over the velocity limits, the SV value receives velocity limiting
processing and is converted to an MV-range value to be used as a manipulated output value.
The computational expressions of this velocity limiting computation are shown below:
MVn = MVn-1 + Dmp (When MVDmp)
MVn = MVn-1 - Dmm (When MV-Dmm)
MV = MVc - MVn-1
Dmp
A per-scan rate-of-change value in the MV range, converted from the upward velocity limit value (DMVP).
Dmm
A per-scan rate-of-change value in the MV range, converted from the downward velocity
limit value (DMVM).
1-291
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint value limiter, refer to:
nSetpoint Value Limiter on page 1-39
RSV
CSV
AUT/MAN
RCAS
CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
Figure 1.23-3 Relationship Among Setpoint Values (SV, CSV and RSV)
The action of the setpoint value pushback varies in accordance with the block mode of the
function block.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-292
n Bumpless Switching
Output Pushback
The bumpless switching function switches the function block mode or switches the cascade
connected downstream blocks manipulated output value (MV) without causing its own manipulated output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless switch).
The action during bumpless switching varies with the control output action and block mode
status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM) is output
pushback.
In the manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the output pushback function sets
as a setpoint value (SV), a SV-range value converted from the manipulated output value
(MV). Also, when the block mode is not remote output (ROUT) or off-service (O/S), the remote manipulated output value (RMV) is caused to track the manipulated output value (MV).
The figure below shows the action of output pushback:
Output pushback
CSV
RSV
BPSW
CAS
AUT
MAN
SV
RCAS
MAN
Velocity
limiting
AUT/CAS
Output
processing
MV
OUT
ROUT
RMV
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the output pushback.
Output pushback: Select Yes or No.
The default is Yes.
Using the output pushback function enables a balanceless bumpless switching of block
modes from manual (MAN) to automatic (AUT).
The following figure shows an example of bumpless cascade closing in a control loop:
IM 33K03E22-50E
PV
1-293
MV
PID
MAN
Output pushback
Output tracking
SV
MV
VELLIM
CAS
AUT/MAN
Output tracking
SV
PV
MV
PID
Figure 1.23-5 Output Pushback and Output Tracking When Cascade Is Open
1.
When cascade connection is open, the output tracking function causes the manipulated
output value (MV) to track data of the output destination.
2.
When cascade connection is closed, the output pushback function performs range conversion to the manipulated output value (MV) and sets the result as the setpoint value
(SV).
3.
The output value tracking function of the upstream block causes the output value of the
upstream function block to track the setpoint value (SV).
In this control loop, when cascade is closed the input value from the upstream function block
will agree with the data value at the output destination of the Velocity limiter block. Therefore,
output will not bump when cascade connection is closed.
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-294
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is a communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and cascade connection is switched is off (i.e., the cascade connection
is open).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
and a failure or output open alarm is detected in the process output.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the block to manual (MAN) mode regardless
of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established and vanished:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the I/O module has been changed via maintenance.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-295
n AUT Fallback
The AUT fallback is an error processing function that switches the block mode from cascade
(CAS) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is established, and switches the
control action to the one that uses values set by the operator.
n Computer Fail
When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote cascade (RCAS) mode or remote output (ROUT) mode temporarily and switches to the computer
backup mode.
When a block mode change command from MAN, AUT or PRD to RCAS or ROUT is sent
while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer
backup mode directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
The transient state mode is a compound block mode consisting of the block mode before
the execution of the block mode change command (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode
(RCAS, ROUT).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-296
2.
Then the function block tests the computer condition in the first scan after the block mode
change command and switches to the computer backup mode.
The computer backup mode is a compound block mode consisting of the backup mode
set via the Function Block Detail Builder (MAN, AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS,
ROUT).
3.
If the computer recovers while the function block is in the computer backup mode, the
block mode changes to remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).
The computer fail condition is a block-mode transition condition used to suspend actions in
the remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT) mode and switches the mode to the
computer backup mode.
A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function blocks to define the remote cascade (RCAS) or
remote output (ROUT) mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has
failed or recovered. The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table
or other function blocks.
Switching to a computer backup mode does not take effect if the backup switch (BSW) is on a
block mode other than remote cascade (RCAS) or remote output (ROUT).
The following example shows when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the
computer backup mode:
RCAS
Computer fails
AUT
(RCAS)
Computer recovers
RCAS
An example when the manual (MAN) mode has been specified for the computer backup
mode is shown as follows:
AUT
ROUT command
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the computer backup mode for each function
block.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-297
blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. This action takes place when the block
mode change interlock condition is established.
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT, CAS,
RCAS or ROUT mode) becomes invalid.
The deviation alarm check in the VELLIM block is applicable to the deviation (DV) between
the manipulated output value (MV) converted to a value in the setpoint (SV) range and the
setpoint value (SV).
When the absolute value of the deviation (DV) exceeds the absolute value of the deviation
alarm setpoint (DL), either a positive direction deviation alarm (DV+) or a negative direction
deviation alarm (DV-) is generated. When an alarm has occurred, if the deviation (DV) absolute value drops lower than the absolute value of the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) minus the
hysteresis value (HYS), the alarm is returned to normal state.
There is no deviation check filter function in the VELLIM block deviation alarm check.
The deviation (DV) that is subject to the deviation alarm check of the VELLIM block is expressed in the following format.
DV=MVs-SV
MVS =
SSHSSL
MSHMSL
(MVMSL)+SSL
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-298
HYS
DL
HYS
DV+
DV-
Figure 1.23-6 Actions of Deviation Alarm Check in the Velocity Limiter Block (VELLIM)
The type of deviation alarm check, deviation alarm setpoint (DL), and alarm hysteresis value
can be set.
The type of deviation alarm check is defined by the deviation alarm check item in the Function Block Detail Builder. The types of deviation alarm checks are given below. The default is
detection of both directions.
No alarm
No detection is performed
When single direction is selected for the deviation alarm check type, only the deviation in the
positive direction is monitored when the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) has a plus sign, and only the deviation in the negative direction is monitored when the deviation alarm setpoint has a
minus sign.
Setting of the deviation alarm check type can be performed in the sequence control block or
CALCU, CALCU-C blocks in addition to the Function Block Detail Builder.
The deviation alarm setpoint (DL) is set by the operation and monitoring function.
Deviation alarm setpoint (DL): Engineering unit data within the SV scale span range
Default is SV scale span.
When single direction is selected for the deviation alarm check type, add the sign (+ or -) for
the direction to be detected to the deviation alarm setpoint (DL) engineering unit data.
Setting for the alarm hysteresis value is done by the Function Block Detail Builder for each
regulatory control block.
Hysteresis:
Engineering unit data within the range of 0 to SV scale span, or percentage data for the SV scale span
When specifying percentage data, add % after the numeric value.
The default is 1.0 %.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-299
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S(MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
-----
AF
-----
-----
AOFS
-----
-----
SV
Setpoint value
-----
CSV
-----
RSV
(*4)
-----
DV
Deviation
-----
MV
(*5)
-----
RMV
(*6)
-----
DL
(SSH - SSL)
SSH-SSL
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
SVH
SSL to SSH
SSH
SVL
SSL to SSH
SSL
DMVP
0 to (SSH - SSL)
SSH-SSL
DMVM
0 to (SSH - SSL)
SSH-SSL
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
TU
0 (second) or 1 (minute)
BPSW
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
*1:
*2:
*3:
Range (*2)
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-300
For more information about valid block modes of the VELLIM block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-301
1.24
The Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) compares the value of the signals from multiple inputs, then selects 1 signal (PV) as output. This block may be applied to the signal selection
loop.
The Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) compare the signals from 2-position input or 3-position
input, then selects the maximum, minimum or medium value signal (PV) as output. The selection may be operated manually.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L):
0
1
IN1
RV1
IN2
RV2
IN3
RV3
2
Automatic
signal
selection
PV
OUT
4
SW
SEL
Selected
number
The Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) are classified into three types according to the automatic selection rule used:
Table 1.24-1 Types of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L)
Code
SS-H
SS-M
SS-L
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L):
Table 1.24-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Signal Selector
Blocks (SS-H/M/L)
I/O terminal
*1:
IN1
Input signal
1
IN2
Input signal
2
IN3
Input signal
3
OUT
Manipulated output
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-302
The methods used by the Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) to obtain input signals (RV1 to
RV3) include two connection input types and one constant input type.
The terminal connection input methods include:
Data reference to other function block via data reference connection from the input connection terminals.
Data setting from other function block via terminal connection to the input connection terminals.
The constant input method does not involve connection to the input connection terminals. Instead, the signal input value (RVn) set from operation and monitoring functions is used as a
constant.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define whether connection input or constant input
is used for each input signal. The input signal for which connection input is specified but no
connection has been made, will not be regarded as signal selection targets of the Signal selector blocks.
Input Signal (IN1 to IN3): Select Constant Input or Connection Input.
The default is Connection Input.
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the SS-H/M/L
blocks, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Signal selection
PV pushback
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-303
n Signal Selection
The signal selection function selects one signal from multiple input signals. The signal to be
selected varies depending upon the type of the Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) and value
of the signal selection switch (SW).
The table below shows the signal selection switch positions and corresponding actions:
Table 1.24-4 Signal Selection Switch Positions and Corresponding Actions
Switch position (SW)
Action
When the signal selection switch (SW) is set to automatic selection (SW=4)
The values of input signals (RV1 to RV3) are compared. The SS-H, SS-L and SS-M
blocks select the maximum, minimum or medium value, respectively as a selected signal
value (PV).
The automatic selection rule to be used is determined by the code of the function block.
If automatic selection is performed and one of the input signals has an invalid (BAD) data status, the maximum or minimum value will be selected from the data excluding the invalid signal. If two input signals are invalid (BAD), the remaining non-invalid input signal (RVn) is selected.
The table below shows invalid input signals and corresponding actions when selecting the
medium value:
Table 1.24-5 Invalid Input Signals and Corresponding Actions When Selecting the Medium Value
Input signal with BAD data status
Action
RV1
RV2 is selected.
RV2
RV1 is selected.
RV3
RV2 is selected.
The rules of determining the data status of the selected signal value (PV) are shown below:
When SW=0
The status of the previous value is stored.
When SW=1 to 3
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-304
The status of the selected signal value (PV) is determined based on the status of the currently selected input signal.
When SW=4
The status of the selected signal value (PV) is determined based on the status of the currently selected input signal. If all input signals have invalid (BAD) data status, the data
status of the previous value is stored.
Whether it is performed automatically or manually, the signal selection action displays the
number of the currently selected input signal (1, 2 or 3) as a selected number (SEL). If the
signal selection switch position is 0 and no signal is selected, SEL becomes 0.
When the signal selection switch position is 0, the selected signal value (PV) can be set from
operation and monitoring functions or other function block.
n PV Pushback
The PV pushback function causes the non-selected input signal values (RV1 to RV3) to agree
with the selected signal value (PV).
The PV pushback action targets the input signal values that are obtained via terminal connection to the input terminals. The PV pushback action is not performed to the input signal values
which are received via data reference or for which constant input is specified.
The figure below shows the action of PV pushback:
0
1
IN1
RV1
IN2
RV2
IN3
RV3
2
Automatic
signal
selection
PV
OUT
4
SW
SEL
Selected
number
PV pushback
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-305
An abrupt change in the selected signal value (PV) upon switching of the selection switch,
may have a negative impact on the process. Preventing this abrupt change in the selected
signal value (PV) is called, bumpless switching.
Combining the PV pushback function with the output tracking function of the input connected
destination function block enables the signal selection switch position to be changed bumplessly. The following example shows a control loop where the signal selection switch position
is changed bumplessly.
Output tracking
PV
PV pushback
MV
RATIO
PV
SS-H
1.
The PV pushback function sets the selected signal value (PV) to the non-selected input
signals (RV1 to RV3).
2.
The output value tracking functions of the upstream function blocks connected to the IN1
to IN3 terminals cause the output values of the upstream function blocks to track the values of input signals (RV1 to RV3).
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range
Default (*2)
-----
O/S(AUT)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
SL
SW
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
SEL
Selected number
0, 1, 2, 3
RV1
(*4)
SL
RV2
(*4)
SL
RV3
(*4)
SL
SWH
0 to 4
SWL
0 to 4
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
(*3)
x
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-306
Range
Default (*2)
-----
SL
-----
*2:
*3:
*4:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
SH
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the SS-H/M/L blocks, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-307
1.25
The Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) compare signals from 2-position or 3-position input from
2 or 3 controller blocks and automatically select one signal as manipulated output value (MV).
Auto-selector blocks may be applied to the override control loops for signal selection.
The Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L) compare the signals from 2-position input or 3-position
input, then selects the maximum, minimum or medium value signal (PV) as output. The selection may be operated manually.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Signal Selector Blocks (SS-H/M/L):
An auto-selector control system can be configured by combining an Auto-Selector Blocks
(AS-H/M/L) and 2 to 3 controller blocks. In other words, final control elements of a single loop
can be controlled in such a way that 2 to 3 variables are monitored and maintained on the
safe side of their presetpoint values using a signal selector unit; whereas, in a normal case
the final elements are controlled based on a single variable.
The figure below shows a function block diagram of the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L):
INT
0
1
IN1
RV1
IN2
RV2
IN3
RV3
2
Automatic
signal
selection
AUT
PV
3
4
Output
processing
MV
OUT
MAN
SW
SEL
Selected
number
The Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) are classified into three types according to the automatic selection rule used:
Table 1.25-1 Types of Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L)
Code
AS-H
AS-M
AS-L
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L):
Table 1.25-2 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Auto-Selector
Blocks (AS-H/M/L)
I/O terminal
IN1
Input signal
1
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-308
I/O terminal
*1:
IN2
Input signal2
IN3
Input signal
3
OUT
Manipulated output
INT
Interlock
SW input
x
x
x
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or an inter-station data link block (ADL).
The methods used by the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) to obtain input signals 1 to 3 (RV1
to RV3) include two connection input types and one constant input type.
The connection input methods include the following:
Data reference to other function block via data reference connection from the input connection terminals
Data setting from other function block via terminal connection to the input connection terminals
The constant input method does not involve connection to the input connection terminals. Instead, the signal input value (RVn) set from operation and monitoring functions is used as a
constant.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define whether connection input or constant input
is used for each input signal. The input signal for which connection input is specified but no
connection has been made, will not be regarded as signal selection targets of the Auto-selector blocks.
Input Signal (IN1 to IN3): Select Constant Input or Connection Input.
The default is Connection Input.
IMPORTANT
When a controller block is terminal connected to the INx terminal of an Auto-selector blocks
(AS-H/M/L), be sure to specify positional type for the control output action of the controller
block.
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-309
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the AS-H/M/L
blocks, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processin, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Signal selection
Bumpless switching
Bumpless switching
Output pushback
Causes the input signal values (RV1, RV2, RV3) to agree with
the manipulated output value (MV) to prevent the manipulated
output value (MV) from changing abruptly.
Initialization manual
MAN fallback
n Signal Selection
The signal selection function selects one signal from multiple input signals. The signal to be
selected varies depending upon the type of the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) and value of
the signal selection switch (SW).
The Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) do not output the selected signal value (PV) if the block
mode is manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN). However, as the signal selection function remains active, the selected number (SEL) and selected signal value (PV) are updated
constantly.
1-310
Action
When the signal selection switch (SW) is set to automatic selection (SW=4)
The values of input signals (RV1 to RV3) are compared. The SS-H, SS-L and SS-M
blocks select the maximum, minimum or medium values, respectively as the selected signal value (PV).
The automatic selection rule to be used is determined by the code of the function block.
If automatic selection is performed and one of the input signals has an invalid (BAD) data status, the maximum or minimum value will be selected from the data excluding the invalid signal. If two input signals have invalid (BAD) data value, the remaining non-invalid input signal
(RVn) is selected.
The table below shows invalid input signals and corresponding actions when selecting the
medium value:
Table 1.25-5 Invalid Input Signals and Corresponding Actions When Selecting the Medium Value
Input signal with BAD data status
Action
RV1
RV2 is selected.
RV2
RV1 is selected.
RV3
RV2 is selected.
The rules of determining the data status of the selected signal value (PV) are shown below:
When SW=0
The previous status is stored.
When SW=1 to 3
The status of the selected signal value (PV) is determined based on the status of the currently selected input signal.
When SW=4
The status of the selected signal value (PV) is determined based on the status of the currently selected input signal. If all input signals are invalid (BAD), the data status of the
previous value is stored.
1-311
SL
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value of the downstream block in cascade loop without causing the manipulated
output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies in accordance with the control output action and
block mode status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) is output
pushback.
The output pushback function causes the input signal values (RV1 to RV3) to agree with the
manipulated output value (MV).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-312
RV1
IN2
RV2
IN3
RV3
PV
Automatic
signal
selection
AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
MAN
SW
SEL
Selected
number
In any block mode, the output pushback function of the Auto-Selector Blocks (AS-H/M/L) sets
as the input signal values (RV1 to RV3), the range-converted values based on MV.
RVn=
SH-SL
MSH-MSL
(MV-MSL)+SL
Output pushback operates in coordination with the output tracking function of the output processing targets, and causes the input signal values (RV1 to RV3) to agree with the values at
the output destination blocks cascade connected downstream.
By using the output pushback function in a cascade control loop built around an Auto-Selector
Blocks (AS-H/M/L), the cascade status can be switched without causing an output bump.
Output pushback is performed only to the input signal values received from the input terminals used for cascade connection. Output pushback is not performed to the input signal values that are extracted via data reference or used as constants during constant input.
The following example shows a control loop where the signal selection switch position is
changed bumplessly.
Output tracking
PV
PV pushback
MV
PID
PV
SS-H
1.
The output tracking function causes the selected signal value (PV) to track data at the
output destination.
2.
The output pushback function sets the tracked data as input signals (RV1 to RV3).
3.
The output value tracking functions of the upstream function blocks connected to the IN1
to IN3 terminals cause the output values of the upstream function blocks to track the values of input signals (RV1 to RV3).
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-313
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
Because the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track
the value at the connected destination, even when the initialization manual (IMAN) mode is
changed to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will override the manual
(MAN) mode. Therefore, no actions in the manual (MAN) mode take place.
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block only
change to that mode when the initialization condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the
initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status at the connected destination of manipulated output value (MV) is
conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the data status at the connected destination of manipulated output value (MV) is a
communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF) (i.e., the cascade connection is
open).
When the connected destination of manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off.
When the connected destination of manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
and a failure or output open alarm is detected in the process output.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-314
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the process variable (PV) is invalid (BAD) or calibration (CAL).
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the I/O module has been changed via maintenance.
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT mode)
becomes invalid.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S(MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-315
PV
SW
MV
SEL
Selected number
RV1
RV2
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
0
SL
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
MSL
0, 1, 2, 3
(*5)
SL
(*5)
-----
RV3
(*5)
-----
SWH
0 to 4
SWL
0 to 4
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
-----
*1:
SEE
Data Name
(*3)
x
(*4)
For more information about valid block modes of the AS-H/M/L blocks, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-316
1.26
Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL) may be applied in a redundant configuration to automatically select one of the two input signals from the same process signal source
but received separately via two signal paths.
The Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL) automatically selects one of the two
input signals. The selected signal is output as process variable (PV).
With the Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL), the redundant configuration become possible. Similar to the dual-redundant transmitter configuration, the dual-redundant analog I/O modules are provided in the process input and output configuration.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block
(SS-DUAL):
Deviation
check
RV1
IN1
RV2
IN2
Automatic
signal
selection
Input
processing
3
SW
PV
OUT
SEL
Selected
number
Figure 1.26-1 Function Block Diagram of Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL):
Table 1.26-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Dual-Redundant
Signal Selector Block (SS-DUAL):
I/O terminal
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN1
Input signal
1
IN2
Input signal
2
OUT
Manipulated output
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-317
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the SS-DUAL block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Signal selection
Tests the data status of two input signal values (RV1, RV2) and selects
the one that satisfies the condition set by the signal selection switch.
Changes the data status of the selected signal (PV) to BAD when two input signals have an invalid (BAD) data status or when a deviation alarm
is present.
n Signal Selection
The signal selection function selects one of multiple input signals.
Action
Selects input signal 1.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-318
Action
If the signal selection switch is set to 3 (automatic selection), the data statuses of input signals RV1 and RV2 are tested, and the signal whose data status is other than invalid (BAD) is
selected as the selected signal value (PV). If both input signals are normal or abnormal, the
previously selected input signal remains selected. If the signal selection switch is set to 1 or
2, the specified input signal is selected unconditionally.
Error condition
In a control loop where the selected signal value (PV) that received this selected signal error
processing is input as a process variable, the block mode changes to manual (MAN).
If the signal selection switch is set to 3, when the difference between the selected signal value
(PV) and non-selected signal value (SV) exceeds the deviation alarm settings value (DL), a
deviation alarm will be generated and the PV data status will become invalid (BAD). While the
deviation alarm is being generated, the PV data value immediately prior to the alarm generation is maintained. However, if SS-DUAL PV Update during Deviation Alarm is selected on
the property sheet of the FCS, the data value will be updated to the selected input value even
if the PV data status is BAD due to a deviation alarm.
The table below shows the difference in operations between when SS-DUAL PV Update during Deviation Alarm is selected and when Maintain PV value is selected.
Table 1.26-5 Operations during Deviation Alarm Generation when SW=3
Item
Update PV Value
PV data status
PV data value
Updates value
Digital filter
No operation
Operates
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-319
Update PV Value
Totalizer
No operation
No operation
Performs check
Performs check
Velocity alarm
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S(AUT)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
SL
DV
Deviation
RV1
SL
RV2
SL
SW
1, 2, 3
SEL
Selected number
1, 2
HH
SL to SH
SH
LL
SL to SH
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
(*3)
x
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-320
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
DL
(SH - SL)
SH - SL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*2:
*3:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
VL
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the SS-DUAL block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.27
1-321
The Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) distributes cascade setpoint signals input from
controller blocks to multiple down-stream controller blocks. This block may be applied in a
cascade control loop with multiple function blocks in parallel downstream connected.
The Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) can distribute cascade signals to as many as 8
function blocks.
Using the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) enables the creation of a cascade control
loop where multiple controller blocks are connected in parallel downstream. The system does
not support to simply link the downstream controller blocks in a chain connection.
The Cascade Signal Distributor Block transmits the cascade open or clamp status of the
downstream controller blocks to the upstream controller block.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block
(FOUT):
CSV
SET
Output
computation
SV
MV1
J01
MV2
J02
MV8
J08
The setpoint value (SV) of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) can be used for data
reference but not for data setting.
The figure below shows an application example of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block
(FOUT):
IN
PV
MV
PID
OUT
SET
SV
MV1
FOUT
MV2
J01
J02
SET
IN
PV
SV
MV
PID
SET
OUT
IN
PV
SV
MV
PID
OUT
Considering the range of each output destination, the cascade setpoint signals to be distributed undergo range matching. Assume that the SV range of the Cascade Signal Distributor
Block (FOUT) is 0 to 100 %, while the PV ranges of the two downstream controller blocks are
0 to 20.00 KG/H and 0 to 10.00 KG/H, respectively. If the manipulated output of the upstream
controller block is 50 %, the output values of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) become 10.00 KG/H and 5.00 KG/H, respectively.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-322
The function blocks that can be used upstream of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block are
limited to those that satisfy the following conditions:
A regulatory control block with a manipulated output value (MV), capable of forming cascade connection
When Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) are connected in cascade in multiple levels,
the maximum number of Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) that can be connected serially between the top block and bottom block is 6. Switch blocks (SW-33, SW-91) inserted in
between are not counted. If FOUT blocks used exceed the limit, the manipulated output value
(MV) of the top function block becomes output failure (PTPF).
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT):
Table 1.27-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FPIT):
I/O terminal
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
SET
Setting input
J01
Manipulated output
1
J02
Manipulated output
2
J03
Manipulated output
3
J04
Manipulated output
4
J05
Manipulated output
5
J06
Manipulated output
6
J07
Manipulated output
7
J08
Manipulated output
8
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
SET terminal can not be connected to the terminals of other stations function block.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-323
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of output processing possible for the FOUT block, see the following:,
refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Bumpless switching
Bumpless switching
Output pushback
MSHn-MSLn
SSH-SSL
(SV-SSL)+MSLn
MVn
SSH
SLS
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-324
MSHn and MSLn are caused to automatically agree with the scale high limit and low limit of
the output destination via the output range tracking function.
SV Range
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the setpoint value (SV) range:
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value downstream in cascade without causing the manipulated output value (MV)
to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies in accordance with the control output action and
block mode status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) is
output pushback.
The output pushback function sets as the setpoint value (SV) and cascade setpoint value
(CSV), the SV-range values converted from the manipulated output value (MVn) via range
conversion.
Combining the output pushback and output tracking functions enables the creation of a control loop where a balanceless bumpless transfer can be performed.
The computational expression of range conversion:
SV=
SSH-SSL (MVn-MSLn)+SSL
MSHn-MSLn
CSV=SV
Output pushback is executed when the following occur:
When the cascade status of one output destination of the Cascade Signal Distributor
Block (FOUT) has changed to close, while the cascade statuses of all other output destinations remain open.
In a configuration where a selector switch exists between the Cascade Signal Distributor
Block (FOUT) and the upstream function block in cascade connected to the FOUT, the
switch status has changed from open to close.
1.
When cascade is open, the output tracking function causes the manipulated output value
(MVn) to track data at the output destination.
2.
When cascade is closed, the manipulated output value (MVn) is pushed back to the level
of SV. However, this occurs only when one of the above output pushback execution conditions is satisfied.
3.
The output value tracking function of the upstream function block causes the output value
of the upstream function block to track the setpoint value (SV).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-325
In a control loop where these actions take place, the output value of the upstream function
block agrees with data at the output destination of the Cascade Signal Distributor Block
(FOUT) when the cascade status is switched to close. Therefore, no output bump occurs as a
result of the cascade status switching to close.
Output pushback can handle only one input signal (RVn) at one time. In other words, balanceless bumpless transfer of a cascade loop is possible only in the first loop.
Bumpless switching based on the output pushback function will not be executed to the second and subsequent output destinations to close cascade. However, abrupt changes in output
as a result of changes in the setpoint value can be prevented if the downstream controller
blocks are PID type controller blocks (PID), as they bypass control computation during the
first control period after the cascade connection establishes.
If the upstream function block is a calculation block, neither output pushback action nor output
tracking action take place.
n Output Clamp
The output clamp is a function that limits the manipulated output value (MV) in such a way
that it cannot be changed to a value greater than or less than the current output value. The
status where the manipulated output value (MV) is limited in this way is called the output
clamp status.
In the FOUT block, if the output value at each output destination is subject to a limitation, the
output clamp status is indicated by the MVn data status high limit clamp (CLP+) or low limit
clamp (CLP-).
The cascade setpoint value (CSV) data status will be data status (CLP+ or CLP-) if the data
statuses for all output points that are in the cascade close status are CLP+ or CLP-, respectively.
SEE
ALSO
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default (*2)
SV
Setpoint value
CSV
MV1
MV2
MV3
MV4
MV5
MV6
MV7
SSL
SSL
IM 33K03E22-50E
Data Name
Manipulated output value 8
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
1-326
Default (*2)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-327
1.28
Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM) adds the feedforward signal to the feedback
control signal then outputs the result. This block may be applied to the control loop that performs feedforward compensation control or base load control.
Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM) adds up the feedback signal (manipulated output value) input to the IN terminal from an up-stream controller block via cascade connection
and the feedforward signal input to the SET terminal via cascade connection, and outputs the
result.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Feedforward Signal Summing Block
(FFSUM):
SET
CSV
BIN
(VN)
CAS
AUT
MAN
TSI
INT
(TSW)
SV
CAS/AUT
Signal
addition
PV
IN
TIN
Output
processing
MV
OUT
MAN
FSW
Figure 1.28-1 Function Block Diagram of Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM):
Table 1.28-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Feedforward Signal
Summing Block (FFSUM)
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
FB signal
input
SET
FF setting
input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
BIN
Compensation input
TIN
Tracking
signal input
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-328
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
I/O terminal
*1:
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or an inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the FFSUM
block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
I/O compensation
I/O compensation
Input compensation
Adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from the outside to the input signal of the PID control computation.
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits.
1-329
Description
Switches the manipulated output value (MV) without causing it
to change abruptly when the block mode has been changed or
when the manipulated output value (MV) has been switched in
a downstream block in cascade.
Bumpless switching
Output pushback
Forcibly sets as the feedback input value, the PV value calculated back from the MV output destination readback value
(MVrb). This prevents the manipulated output value (MV) from
changing abruptly.
Balance action
Bumpless switching
Initialization manual
Control hold
MAN fallback
AUT fallback
Input
compensation
AUT/MAN
CSV
+
CB
CK
+
PV
CAS
SV
CV
FSW
Signal
addition
MV
Signal Addition
The following computational expressions are used to add up the PV value (CV) after input
compensation and feedforward setpoint value (SV) via range conversion to obtain a manipulated output value (MV).
MV=CVm+SVm+BLn
IM 33K03E22-50E
CVm=
SVm=
MSH-MSL
SH-SL
MSH-MSL
SSH-SSL
1-330
(CV-SL)+MSL
(SV-SSL)+MSL
MV
SV
: Balance term
SH
SL
Depending upon the operating condition of the plant, it is sometimes desirable that Feedforward Signal Summing be disabled completely. When the feedforward control signal cut switch
(FSW) is turned ON, the feedback input value after input compensation directly receives
range conversion and is output as a manipulated output value (MV) in the automatic (AUT) or
cascade (CAS) mode.
MV=CVm+BLn
During the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, the following balance operation is performed to prevent an output bump as a result of switching the feedforward control signal cut
switch.
When the feedforward signal cut switch (FSW) is turned ON, BLn changes to the value shown
below:
BLn=MVrb-CVm
MVrb : MV output destination readback value
When the feedforward switch (FSW) is turned OFF, the following computation is performed to
determine the BLn value.
BLn=MVrb-SVm-CVm
SV Range
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the setpoint value (SV) range:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-331
n I/O Compensation
The I/O compensation function adds the I/O compensated value (VN) received from outside
to the input signal or output signal of PID control computation, while the controller block is operating automatically in the automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode.
Only input compensation is available with the Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM).
CB
CK
PV
PVn
+
CVn
PID control
computation
MV
When creating a base load control system, set the median value of feedforward signals in a
normal operating state as the input compensated value (VN). Also, preset CK and CV to -1.0
and 0.0, respectively. As a result, the feedback control signal (PV) is compensated by its deviation from the median value of feedforward signals (SV) and obtained as a final manipulated
output value (MV).
1-332
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint value limiter, refer to:
CSV
AUT/MAN
CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
The action of the setpoint value pushback varies in accordance with the block mode of the
function block.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-333
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value of the downstream block in cascade loop without causing the manipulated
output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies in accordance with the control output action and
block mode status.
The bumpless switching functions available with the Feedforward Signal Summing Block
(FFSUM) include:
Output pushback
Balance action
Output Pushback
The output pushback function sets as the feedback input value (PV), the value calculated
back from the MV output destination readback value (MVrb).
The following computational expressions are used to calculate PV back from MVrb:
PV=CV-CK (VN+CB)
SH-SL
CV=
MSH-MSL
(CVm-MSL)+SL
CVm=MVrb-SVm-BLn
SVm=
MSH-MSL
SSH-SSL
(SV-SSL)+MSL
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-334
MV
PID
SV
PV
MV
FFSUM
Output tracking
CAS
AUT/MAN
Output tracking
Output pushback
PV
SV
MV
PID
Figure 1.28-5 Output Pushback and Output Tracking when Cascade is Open
1.
When cascade is open, the output tracking function causes MVrb to track data at the output destination.
2.
When cascade is closed, the output pushback function calculates the feedback input value (PV) from MVrb, and sets the obtained value as PV.
3.
The output value tracking function of the upstream block in cascade causes the output
value of the upstream function block to track the feedback input value (PV).
Balance Action
The balance action function adjusts the balance term value when the feedback input value
(PV) changes abruptly during automatic operation in the auto (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode,
in order to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly.
An abrupt change in the manipulated output value (MV) during automatic operation may have
a negative impact on the process. Preventing this abrupt change in the manipulated output
value (MV) is called, bumpless switching.
The balance action prevents the manipulated output value from changing abruptly when the
feedback input value undergoes an abrupt change.
The balance term is adjusted based on the following computational expressions:
BLn=MVrb-CVm-SVm
CVm=
SVm=
MSH-MSL
SH-SL
MSH-MSL
SSH-SSL
(CV-SL)+MSL
(SV-SSL)+MSL
CV=PV+CK (VN+CB)
If no input compensation is performed, CV in the above computational expressions is the
same as PV.
The Feedforward Signal Summing Block (FFSUM) executes this balance action when the
feedback control function block connected upstream in cascade issues a warning that the setpoint value will be bumped.
The execution conditions of the balance action:
When a Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) is connected upstream and the conditional (CND) status of the upstream output value is canceled.
A calculation block that does not provide a balance function is connected upstream.
The initialization manual (MAN) mode is canceled while the output pushback value is being limited to the MSH or MSL value.
When the balance action is executed, BLn is moved toward 0 by the ramp constant (RP) during each of the subsequent scan periods, until it finally reaches 0.
Ramp constant (RP):
Engineering unit data between 0 and the MV scale span range limit
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-335
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
Because the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track
the value at the connected destination, even when the initialization manual (IMAN) mode is
changed to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will precede the manual
(MAN) mode. In other words, any operation to change to the manual (MAN) mode becomes
invalid.
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block only
change to that mode when initialization condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the
initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is a communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and the switch is disconnected (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
and a failure or output open alarm has occurred in the process output.
The output signal is not a pulse-width output and the data status of the input signal at the
TIN or TSI terminal has become invalid (BAD) during the tracking (TRK) mode.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-336
n Control Hold
The control hold is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily
while maintaining the current block mode. Unlike initialization manual, the control output action is performed normally during control hold.
The control hold action takes place when the following conditions are establishes during automatic operation (AUT, CAS):
The connected destination of the IN terminal is open (i.e., not selected via a selector
switch, etc.)
The connected destination of the IN terminal or the connected destination of the data at
the first connected destination is a process input, and the process input is temporarily in a
non-response state (momentary power failure)
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the block to manual (MAN) mode regardless
of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the process variable (PV) is invalid (BAD).
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the data status of the setpoint value (SV) is invalid (BAD).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the I/O module has been changed via maintenance.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-337
n AUT Fallback
The AUT fallback is an error processing function that switches the block mode from cascade
(CAS) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is established, and switches the
control action to the one that uses values set by the operator.
Changes the block mode from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT) to continue control using
values set by the operator.
Once the AUT fallback condition establishes, the block mode remains automatic (AUT) even
when the condition vanishes.
The AUT fallback condition is used to change the block mode of the function block from cascade (CAS) to automatic (AUT) so that control can be continued using values set by the operator. When this condition is established, it indicates that abnormality has been detected in the
cascade setpoint value (CSV) for some reason.
The following examples shows when the AUT fallback condition is established:
CASAUT
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (AUT)
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define whether or not to use the AUT fallback.
AUT Fallback: Select Yes or No.
The default is No.
The AUT fallback condition is established when the AUT fallback is set as Yes via the Function Block Detail Builder and the data status of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) has become
invalid (BAD) or communication error (NCOM).
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions will take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT or CAS
mode) becomes invalid.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-338
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
SL
SV
SSL
CSV
SSL
MV
MSL
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
SVH
SSL to SSH
SSH
SVL
SSL to SSH
SSL
VN
-----
0.0
RP
Ramp constant
0 to (MSH - MSL)
MSH - MSL
CK
Compensation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compensation bias
-----
0.000
RMV
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
FSW
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
SH
-----
SL
-----
*1:
*2:
Range (*2)
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
*3:
SEE
ALSO
1-339
For more information about valid block modes of the FFSUM block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-340
1.29
Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL) adds output compensation signals to the feedback control signal the outputs the result. This block may be applied to add non-interference
compensation signals to two mutually non-interference control loops.
Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL) adds output compensation signals to the feedback control signal (manipulated output value) that are received by the IN terminal from an
upstream control loop via cascade connection.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Non-Interference Control Output Block
(XCPL):
BIN
TIN
Signal
addition
PV
INT
(TSW)
VN
IN
TSI
AUT
Output
processing
MV
OUT
MAN
(MV, MV)
SUB
Figure 1.29-1 Function Block Diagram of Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL)
The figure below shows an example of mutually non-interacting control using Non-interference Control Output Blocks (XCPL):
PID
MV
XCPL
VN
MV
CALC
CALC
PID
MP
VN
XCPL
MV
Figure 1.29-2 Example of Mutually Non-Interference Control Using Non-Interference Control Output
Block (XCPL):
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL):
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-341
Table 1.29-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL):
I/O terminal
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
IN
FB signal
input
OUT
Manipulated output
SUB
Auxiliary
output
BIN
Compensation input
TIN
Tracking
signal input
TSI
Tracking
SW input
INT
Interlock
SW input
*1:
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the XCPL block,
refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-342
Description
Switches the increasing/decreasing direction of the manipulated output value (MV) in accordance with the increase or
decrease in the feedback input signal (PB). The control action
direction of this function block is always direct.
Bumpless switching
Forcibly sets as the feedback input value (PV) the value calculated back from the manipulated output value (MV). This
prevents the manipulated output value (MV) from change
abruptly.
Balance action
Bumpless switching
Initialization manual
MAN fallback
CB
CK
+
PV
MV
The following expression is used to add the non-interference compensated value (VN) to the
feedback input signal value (PV):
MV=PV+CK (VN+CB)+BLn
MV : Manipulated output value
PV : Feedback input signal value
VN : Non-interacting compensated value
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-343
CK : Compensation gain
CB : Compensation bias
BLn : Balance term
The non-interference compensation value (VN) can be set from other function block via data
setting and also can be input via data reference from the compensation input terminal BIN. If
the compensation input terminal (BIN) is not connected, this value is considered to the handled via data setting.
For the Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL), only the MV scale may be defined.
The process variable (PV) uses the same scale as the manipulated output value (MV).
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value of the downstream block in cascade loop without causing the manipulated
output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies in accordance with the control output action and
block mode status.
The bumpless switching functions available with the Non-Interference Control Output Block
(XCPL) include:
Output pushback
Balance action
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-344
Output Pushback
The output pushback function sets as the feedback input value (PV), the value calculated
back from the manipulated output value (MV).
The following computational expression is used to calculate the manipulated output value
(MV):
PV=MVrb-CK (VN+CB)-BLn
MVrb : MV output destination readback value
BLn
: Balance term
In the manual (MAN) or initialization manual (IMAN) mode
BLn=0.0
When output is clamped in the automatic (AUT)
BLn=BLn-1
If the calculated value exceeds the PV range, it is limited to the MSH or MSL value.
Using the output pushback function in combination with the output tracking function enables
balanceless bumpless transfer of cascade loop.
1.
When cascade is open, the output tracking function causes the manipulated output value
(MV) to track data at the output destination.
2.
When cascade is closed, the output pushback function back calculates the manipulated
output value (MV), and sets the obtained value as the feedback input value (PV).
3.
The output value tracking function of the upstream block in cascade causes the output
value of the upstream function block to track the feedback input value (PV).
Balance Action
The balance action function adjusts the balance term value when the feedback input value
(PV) changes abruptly during automatic operation in the auto (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode,
in order to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly.
The BLn is adjusted by the following computational expression. Using the balance action prevents the manipulated output value from changing abruptly when the feedback input value undergoes an abrupt change.
BLn=MVrb-PV-CK (VN+CB)
The Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL) executes this balance action when the
feedback control function block connected upstream in cascade issues a warning that the setpoint value will be bumped.
The following are execution conditions of the balance action:
When a Cascade Signal Distributor Block (FOUT) is connected upstream and the conditional (CND) status of the upstream output value is canceled
A calculation block that does not provide a balance function is connected upstream
The initialization manual (MAN) mode is canceled while the output pushback value is being limited to the MSH or MSL value
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-345
When the balance action is executed, BLn is moved toward 0 by the ramp constant (RP)
during each of the subsequent scan periods, until it finally reaches 0.
Ramp constant (RP): Engineering unit data between 0 and the MV scale span range limit.
The default is the MV scale span.
IMPORTANT
Observe the following rules when creating a control system that includes a Non-Interference
Control Output Block (XCPL):
Always specify velocity type for the control output action of the upstream controller
blocks in cascade.
Specify output limiters or output velocity limiters for the upstream controller blocks in
cascade in such a way that no limiting action will actually take place.
Specify No for the output compensation specification of the upstream controller blocks
in cascade.
To manually control the loop, change the block mode of the Non-Interference Control Output Block (XCPL) to manual (MAN).
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
Because the initialization manual action causes the manipulated output value (MV) to track
the value at the connected destination, even when the initialization manual (IMAN) mode is
changed to manual (MAN), the initialization manual (IMAN) mode will override the manual
(MAN) mode. In other words, any operation to change to the manual (MAN) mode becomes
invalid.
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block only
change to that mode when the initialization condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the
initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
1-346
AUT
The initialization manual condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and the connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade connection is
open).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
and a failure or output open alarm is detected in the process output.
The output signal is not a pulse-width output and the data status of the input signal at the
TIN or TSI terminal has become invalid (BAD) during the tracking (TRK) mode.
n MAN Fallback
The MAN fallback is an error processing function that stops the control and forces the function
block to enter manual operation state. This action takes place when the MAN fallback condition is established.
The MAN fallback stops the control by changing the block to manual (MAN) mode regardless
of the current operation status, and forces the function block to enter manual operation state.
Once the MAN fallback condition is established, the block mode remains manual (MAN) even
when the condition later vanishes.
The MAN fallback condition is used to stop the control by changing the function block to manual (MAN) mode regardless of the current operation status, and forces the function block to
enter manual operation state. When the MAN fallback condition is established, it indicates
that a fatal error has occurred and requests operator interruption.
The following example shows when the MAN fallback condition is established:
AUTMAN
IMAN (CAS) IMAN (MAN)
The MAN fallback condition is established in the following situation:
When the data status of the feedback input signal (PV) is invalid (BAD).
When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) is output failure (PTPF).
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and the FCS is
having an initial cold start.
When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O, and one of the
I/O points connected to the I/O module has been changed via maintenance.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-347
blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. This action takes place when the block
mode change interlock condition is established.
Stops the control computation processing of the function blocks that are operating automatically, and disables the currently stopped function blocks from changing to an automatic operation state. The following actions take place:
Any block mode change command to obtain an automatic operation state (AUT mode)
becomes invalid.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
MSL
MV
MSL
MH
MSL to MSH
MSH
ML
MSL to MSH
MSL
VN
-----
0.0
RP
Ramp constant
0 to (MSH - MSL)
MSH - MSL
CK
Compensation gain
-10.000 to 10.000
1.000
CB
Compensation bias
-----
0.000
PMV
MSL to MSH
MSL
TSW
Tracking switch
0, 1
PSW
Preset MV switch
0, 1, 2, 3
RSW
0, 1
OPHI
MSL to MSH
MSH
OPLO
MSL to MSH
MSL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
(*3)
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-348
For more information about valid block modes of the XCPL block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-349
1.30
Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) is capable of distributing the manipulated output signals
from the upstream control loop to two output destinations via a signal distribution switch. This
block may be applied to the loops when split the upstream signal to multiple downstream control loops with different operation ranges.
Control Signal Splitter Blocks (SPLIT) may be applied to the multiple downstream control
loops with different operation ranges.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT):
0
CSV
SET
CAS
AUT
RSV
SW
MV1
OUT1
Range
conversion
MV2
OUT2
SV
RCAS
Range
conversion
Figure 1.30-1 Function Block Diagram of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)
Data setting cannot be performed to the manipulated output values (MV1, MV2) of the Control
Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT).
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT):
Table 1.30-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT)
I/O terminal
SET
*1:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
Setting input
OUT1
Manipulated output
1
OUT2
Manipulated output
2
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-350
The only processing timing available for the SPLIT block is a periodic startup. Selections
available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1:
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of output processing and alarm processing possible for the SPLIT
block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Description
Switches the increasing/decreasing direction of the manipulated output value (MVn) in accordance with the increase or
decrease in the setpoint value (SV). The control action direction of this function block is set for each output destination.
Limits the setpoint value (SV) within the setpoint high/low limits (SVH, SVL).
Bumpless switching
Bumpless switching
Balance action
Initialization manual
AUT fallback
Computer failure
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-351
As part of its output processing, the SPLIT block employs a special output clamp.
Range conversion
(manipulated output
value computation)
MV1
Range conversion
(manipulated output
value computation)
MV2
SV
2
Signal
distribution
switch
SW
SV Range
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the setpoint value (SV) range:
The Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) gives two manipulated output values (MV1, MV2)
calculated from the process variable (SV). The computational expressions are shown in the
later paragraphs.
In the Function Block Detail Builder, user can preset the SV-based action range for two manipulated outputs (SRH1, SRL1, SRH2, SRL2), the values defined should be within the SV
range. The figure below shows an example of action ranges:
IM 33K03E22-50E
MV2
MSH1
MSH2
MSL1
SSL
SV
SRL1
SRL2
SSH
SRH1
1-352
MSL2
SRH2
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the manipulated output value computation:
The two manipulated output values (MV1, MV2) can be obtained by the following expressions
when the SV is meaningful:
MVi=CALCi+BLi (n)
When the MV output action direction is direct
CALCi=MSLi+
MSHi-MSLi
SRHi-SRLi
(SV-SRLi)
MSHi-MSLi
SRHi-SRLi
(SV-SRLi)
SV
: Setpoint value
MSHi
MSLi
SRHi
SRLi
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-353
Action
The value at the manipulated output point that has not been selected by the signal distribution
switch is always caused to agree with the value at the output destination via output tracking.
The control action direction function switches the increasing/decreasing direction of a manipulated output value (MVn) corresponding to the increase or decrease in the setpoint value (SV).
The manipulated output value (MV) changes in the same direction as the change of the setpoint variable (SV) is called direct action, while the MV value changing to the reverse direction to the change of SV is called reverse action.
Use the Function Block Detail Builder as define the control action direction:
MV1 Output Direction/MV2 Output Direction: Select Direct or Reverse
The default is Direct.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint value limiter, refer to:
nSetpoint Value Limiter on page 1-39
IM 33K03E22-50E
RSV
CSV
AUT
RCAS
1-354
CAS
SV
Setpoint value
Control
computation
Figure 1.30-4 Relationship among Setpoint Values (SV, CSV and RSV)
The action of the setpoint value pushback varies in accordance with the block mode of the
function block.
n Bumpless Switching
The bumpless switching function switches the block mode of the function block or manipulated output value of the downstream block in cascade loop without causing the manipulated
output value (MV) to change abruptly (i.e., bumpless change).
The action during bumpless switching varies with the control output action and block mode
status.
The type of bumpless switching performed by the Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) is balance action.
The balance action adjusts the balance term value when the feedback input value (PV)
changes abruptly during automatic operation in the auto (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, in order to prevent the manipulated output value (MV) from changing abruptly.
Using the balance action enables bumpless switching of block modes from automatic (AUT)
to cascade (CAS).
The balance action prevents the manipulated output value from changing abruptly when the
operating condition of the plant has changed. The following computational expression is used
to adjust BLi:
BLi (n)=MVRBi-CALCi
BLi (n) : Balance term (i=1 or 2)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-355
When signal distribution is started after the setting of the signal distribution switch (SW)
has been changed
When an initialization request is issued from an upstream block in cascade during signal
distribution
When an initialization request is issued from an output destination function block during
signal distribution
When the balance action is executed, BLi is moved toward 0 by the specified value of ramp
constant (RP) during each of the subsequent scan periods, until it finally reaches 0.
n Initialization Manual
The initialization manual is an error processing function that suspends the control action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization manual (IMAN). This action takes place
when the initialization manual condition is established.
The initialization manual function suspends the control action and control output action temporarily during the automatic (AUT) mode or other automatic control operation mode when the
initialization manual condition is established, and changes the block mode of the function
block to initialization manual (IMAN).
The block returns to the original mode when the initialization manual condition vanishes. However, if try to change block mode in the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the block only
change to that mode when the initialization condition vanishes.
The initialization manual condition is a block mode transition condition that suspends the control action and control output action temporarily by changing the block mode to initialization
manual (IMAN). The initialization manual (IMAN) block mode becomes active only when the
initialization manual condition is established.
The following example shows when the initialization manual condition establishes and vanishes:
AUT
IMAN (AUT)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-356
AUT
The initialization manual condition for the Control Signal Splitter Block (SPLIT) is satisfied in
the following cases:
When SW=1 and the initialization manual condition is established at the connected destination of the OUT1 terminal.
When SW=2 and the initialization manual condition is established at the connected destination of the OUT2 terminal.
When SW=3 and the initialization manual condition (same as above) is satisfied at the
connected destinations of the OUT1 and OUT2 terminals.
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is conditional (CND) (i.e., the cascade connection is open).
When the data status at the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV)
is a communication error (NCOM) or output failure (PTPF).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a switch block
(SW-33, SW-91) and the cascade connection is switched off (i.e., the cascade connection
is open).
When the connected destination of the manipulated output value (MV) is a process output
and a failure or output open alarm is detected in the process output.
n AUT Fallback
The AUT fallback is an error processing function that switches the block mode from cascade
(CAS) to automatic (AUT) when the AUT fallback condition is established, and switches the
control action to the one that uses values set by the operator.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-357
n Computer Fail
When the computer fail is detected, the function block suspends the action in the remote cascade (RCAS) mode temporarily and switches to the computer backup mode.
When the function block mode is remote cascade (RCAS), the function block receives the setpoint value (SV) or manipulated output value (MV) from a supervisory system computer via
control bus communication.
When the computer fails, the block changes mode to the preset computer backup mode (AUT
or CAS) which indicates that an abnormality has been detected in the supervisory computer.
When the computer recovers, the block returns to the mode before the change.
The following actions take place when the computer failure condition exist and a block mode
change command from AUT or CAS to RCAS is sent:
1.
When a block mode change command from AUT or CAS to RCAS is sent while the computer fails (BSW=ON), the function block does not switch to the computer backup mode
directly but switches to the transient state mode first.
The transient state mode is a compound block mode consisting of the block mode before
the execution of the block mode change command (AUT, CAS) and a remote mode
(RCAS).
2.
Then the function block tests the computer condition in the first scan after the block mode
change command and switches to the computer backup mode.
The computer backup mode is a compound block mode consisting of the backup mode
set via the Function Block Detail Builder (AUT, CAS) and a remote mode (RCAS).
3.
If the computer recovers while the function block is in the computer backup mode, the
block mode changes to remote cascade (RCAS).
The computer fail condition is a block-mode transition condition used to suspend actions in
the remote cascade (RCAS) mode and switches the mode to the computer backup mode.
A backup switch (BSW) is provided in function blocks to define the remote cascade (RCAS)
mode. The status of this switch determines whether the computer has failed or recovered.
The value of the backup switch (BSW) can be set from a sequence table or other function
blocks.
Switching to a computer backup mode does not take effect if the backup switch (BSW) is on a
block mode other than remote cascade (RCAS)
The following example shows when the automatic (AUT) mode has been specified for the
computer backup mode:
RCAS
Computer fails
AUT
(RCAS)
Computer recovers
RCAS
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-358
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to define the computer backup mode for each function
block.
n Output Clamp
The output clamp is a function that limits the manipulated output value (MV) in such a way
that it cannot be changed to a value greater than or less than the current output value. The
status where the manipulated output value (MV) is limited in this way is called the output
clamp status.
In the SPLIT block, the output clamp statuses for manipulated output values MV1 and MV2
respectively are indicated as data status high limit clamp (CLP+) and low limit clamp (CLP-).
The clamp status of the cascade setpoint value (CSV) is as follows:
SEE
ALSO
When SW=0
There is no clamp data status.
When SW=1
When the MV1 output operation is direct, the clamp status is the same as for MV1. For
reverse operation, if MV1 is CLP+ status, then the status is CLP-, if MV1 is CLP- status,
then the status is CLP+.
When SW=2
When the MV2 output operation is direct, the clamp status is the same as for MV2. For
reverse operation, if MV2 is CLP+ status, then the status is CLP-, if MV2 is CLP- status,
then the status is CLP+.
When SW=3
If output operation is direct and both MV1 and MV2 are CLP+ status, or if output operation is reverse and MV1, MV2 are CLP- status, then the status becomes CLP+. Or, if the
output operation is direct and both MV1 and MV2 are CLP- status, or if the output operation is reverse and MV1, MV2 are CLP+, then the status becomes CLP-.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
-----
O/S (AUT)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
-----
AF
-----
-----
AOFS
-----
-----
SV
Setpoint value
SSL
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-359
Range (*2)
Default (*2)
SSL
RSV
(*3)
SSL
MV1
MV2
SVH
SSL to SSH
SSH
SVL
SSL to SSH
SSL
RP1
0 to (MSH1 - MSL1)
MSH1 MSL1
RP2
0 to (MSH2 - MSL2)
MSH2 MSL2
SW
0, 1, 2, 3
BSW
Backup switch
0, 1
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
*2:
*3:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
CSV
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the SPLIT block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-360
1.31
Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) manages the alarms initiated from up to 16 function
blocks. This block may be applied to inhibit the unnecessary alarm notifications from the function blocks.
The Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) controls alarms initiated from up to 16 function
blocks. The block has function to activate or inhibit the alarms sent from other function blocks.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R):
Representative alarm
Alarm
priority
masking
SW
Input masking
SV
ALRM
Q01
Q02
Q16
Function
block 1
Function
block 2
Function
block 16
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R):
Table 1.31-1 Connection Methods and Connected destinations of the I/O Terminals of Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R):
I/O terminal
Q01 to Q16 Alarm input
*1:
*2:
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
Data refer- Data setTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
connection
I/O
block
x
x (*2)
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
Connection allowed to any input terminal only when specifying an annunciator message to a software I/O.
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-361
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the ALM-R block, refer to:
nAlarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control on page 1-15
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Annunciator messages
To specify an alarm input controlled by the representative alarm, use the Function Block Detail Builder to specify a tag name for the corresponding function block or annunciator message.
Each function block has a number of alarm items. The alarm processing range, i.e., whether
all alarm items of a function block are regarded as input targets or only some of them are regarded, can be specified for each input terminal. The alarm processing range specification is
determined by the priority level of the alarm.
Specify one of the following four types of alarm processing ranges for each input terminal:
Table 1.31-2 Alarms under different handling categories
Range setting
Target alarms
Full alarm
All alarms
Those alarms excluded from the alarm processing range cannot be controlled collectively by
the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R). Individual alarms of the annunciator messages or
function blocks that are specified as input targets of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)
are notified via the block. Alarm notifications issued directly to operation and monitoring functions are masked. However, the target of this alarm masking is limited by priority masking
Name
NR
Normal
HALM
MALM
LALM
RALM
CNF
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-362
For example, if the most important alarm among all alarms present is a medium-priority alarm,
the alarm status becomes medium-priority alarm present (MALM).
When the status of this representative alarm changes, a process alarm message is initiated
for output.
The alarm masking function is also effective on representative alarms. For example, if a Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) is specified as an input source of another Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R), the representative alarm of the input source can be masked. Using this
method, a nested alarm filtering system can be configured.
The alarm detection specification of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) is always fixed
to detection Yes for all alarms shown in the Table of Alarms of Representative Alarm Block
(ALM-R) except connection failure alarms.
By the input masking function explained in the following page, certain alarm inputs of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) may be excluded from the targets of above representative
alarm processing.
n Input Masking
The input masking function specifies by the setpoint value (SV), which input points are and
are not regarded as a target of representative alarm processing among the 16 alarm input
points connected to the input terminals.
Input masking is performed by setting as setpoint value (SV), an input masking pattern represented by a numeric value between 0 and 15. The setpoint value (SV) can be changed via
setting from operation and monitoring functions or other function block.
The table below shows the setpoint values (input masking patterns) and corresponding targets of representative alarm processing:
Table 1.31-4 Setpoint Values and Corresponding Targets of Representative Alarm Processing
SV
2 to 15
When the setpoint value (SV) is 2 through 15, the targets of representative alarm processing
can be defined using the Function Block Detail Builder. Define the targets for each of the Representative alarm blocks (ALM-R) used, by the following methods:
Table 1.31-5 Table of Input Masking Patterns
SV
Input
point
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Specify Y, N or . for each entry column in the table of input masking patterns, where the X
axis and Y axis represent the setpoint value (SV) and input point, respectively. Y, N and .
have the following meanings:
Y
Regarded as a target of representative alarm processing.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-363
N
Not regarded as a target of representative alarm processing.
Alarm of the input source are unmasked.
.
Not regarded as a target of representative alarm processing.
The alarm masking status of alarms at the input source is not manipulated at all.
When releasing all the alarm inputs from masking, a pattern of SV defined with Ns for all
alarm inputs should be used.
However, for the alarms that beyond the ALM-R handling scope, the alarm masking cannot be
released by the SV pattern with all Ns.
For an example, the pattern when SV=2 is defined with all Ns. If the ALM-R handling scope
is defined with Medium-priority alarm, when releasing alarm mask, only the input alarms under the Medium-priority are released, the masked High-priority alarms cannot be released.
Note that when the specification changes from Y to . following a change in the setpoint value (SV), the current alarm masking status is held as is.
After the specification of an input point is changed from Y to ., alarm notifications will no
longer be transmitted from the function block corresponding to the input point or from the
Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R).
When the alarm masking status at the connected destination of an input terminal is changed
from unmasked to masked, the first alarm that occurs at this connected destination after the
change will not be masked. Therefore, caution should be exercised when changing the input
masking pattern from N to Y, from N to ., or from . to Y.
n Priority Masking
The priority masking function specifies the range of alarm masking via the priority masking
switch (SW) for each alarm of the annunciator message and function block that is connected
to a terminal of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R).
Priority masking targets the alarms included in the alarm processing range.
Name
Action
No masking
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-364
Name
Action
Masks the alarms whose priority is lower than that of
the highest-priority alarm currently occurred in the
connected function block.
Only the alarm of the highest priority at the moment
is not masked.
Dynamic masking
Among all alarms at the alarm inputs of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R), those of the
priority (priority level) specified by the value of the priority masking switch (SW) or lower will
be masked. In case of priority mask, all the alarms of the connected function block with lower
level than the alarm of the highest priority level occurred so far will be masked.
The priority masking switch (SW) can be changed by the operator or via setting operation
from other function block.
When the setting of the priority masking switch (SW) is changed, any changes in the alarm
masking status will be limited by the priorities that are included in the alarm processing range
specified by the builder. The table below shows alarm masking ranges for different combinations of the alarm processing range specification and SW setting:
Table 1.31-7 Alarm Masking Ranges
Alarm processing range specification by the builder
Medium-priority
Low-priority alarm Logging alarm or
Full alarm
alarm or lower
or lower
lower
SW
0
Full alarm
Medium-priority
alarm or lower
Low-priority alarm
or lower
Low-priority alarm
or lower
Logging alarm or
lower
Logging alarm or
lower
5
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Medium-priority
alarm or lower
(*1)
Low-priority alarm
or lower
Logging alarm or
lower
Logging alarm or
lower
(*2)
(*3)
(*4)
The alarm masking range covers those alarms occurred in the connected function block whose priority is lower than that of
the most important alarm currently present.
The alarm masking range covers those alarms occurred in the connected function block whose priority is lower than that of
the most important alarm currently present among medium-priority alarms and alarms of lower priorities.
The alarm masking range covers those alarms occurred in the connected function block whose priority is lower than that of
the most important alarm currently present among low-priority alarms and alarms of lower priorities.
The alarm masking range covers those alarms occurred in the connected function block whose priority is lower than that of
the most important alarm currently present among logging alarms and alarms of lower priorities.
HI (medium-priority alarm)
1-365
In this example, the builder-specified alarm range is assumed to be All alarms. The figure is
based on a scenario in which a high-priority alarm, medium-priority alarm and low-priority
alarm have occurred simultaneously at a function block controlled by the Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R), to depict how the alarm masking status changes, or how the alarm status is recovered in the order of higher to lower priority alarms.
Among all alarms present, only the alarm of the highest priority is not subject to masking.
Dynamic masking checks the priority level of alarms in each function block. For an example, if
a function block is sending an alarm with high priority level, the new alarms with lower levels
will be masked. While if another function block connected in the same ALM-R is in normal status, an new alarm with medium level sent from this block will not be masked.
So that it is useful to used dynamic masking for handling alarms with multiple priority levels.
The alarms of a function block that connected to ALM-R can be inhibited by changing the
state of the priority level switch (SW) on ALM-R block.
No masking (SW=0)
The current alarm masking status of the input source is held.
This also applies to the action of specifying N by switching the setpoint value (SV). Although the alarms for which N is specified are normally unmasked, they are not unmasked if the SW value is 0.
In some cases the alarm masking status of a function block controlled by the Representative
Alarm Block (ALM-R) may not be changed directly from operation and monitoring functions or
via other means.
IMPORTANT
During on-line maintenance, merely changing the alarm processing level of the tag assigned
to a connected destination of the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) does not make the
Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) a target of on-line loading. In this case, discrepancies
may occur between the Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R) and the connected destination
block, causing actions to become unstable. Specify the representative alarm itself as a target
of on-line loading, as well.
Data Name
MODE
Block mode
ALRM
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
x
Range
Default
-----
O/S (MAN)
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-366
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
SV
Setpoint value
0 to 15
SW
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the ALM-R block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-367
1.32
Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) counts process values that are products of pulse signals multiplied by the pulse conversion coefficient. This block may be applied to count process values
obtained by multiplying the input pulse signals by pulse conversion coefficient.
Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) counts process values that are products of pulse signals multiplied by the pulse conversion coefficient. In addition, the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) has a
preset counter function.
Counting operations of the counter, such as issuing of reset and hold commands, are performed from a sequence control block, calculation block or other function blocks. The block
status that indicates the action status can be referenced from other function blocks.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC):
PH
DL
Input
processing
IN
Count
processing
CTUP
PALM
PV
RMV
OUT
HSW
Figure 1.32-1 Function Block Diagram of Pulse Count Input Block (PTC)
The table below shows the connection methods and connected destinations of the I/O terminals of the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC):
Table 1.32-1 Connection Methods and Connected Destinations of I/O Terminals of Pulse Count Input
Block (PTC):
I/O terminal
*1:
IN
Measurement
input
OUT
Manipulated
output
Connection method(*1)
Connection destination(*1)
CondiStatus Terminal
Data ref- Data setProcess Software Function
tion test- manipu- connecerence
ting
I/O
I/O
block
ing
lation
tion
x
x: Connection allowed
Blank: Connection not allowed
: Connection allowed only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block (ADL).
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-368
The only processing timing available for the PTC block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1:
SEE
ALSO
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the PTC block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
The PTC block performs count processing as its control computation processing. The count
processing contains the following functions.
Pause operation
Restart operation
The input signal conversion for the Pulse Count Input Block (PTC) counts the increments of
integrated pulse count values (P) read from the input connection terminal then multiply it by
the pulse conversion factor to convert it into count value (PV).
The following is the computational expression for the count value (PV):
PVn = Pfactor (Pn - Pn-1)+PVn-1
P
: Count value, decimal-point notation is valid, the value returns to 0 when exceeding
8 digits.
The subscripts n and n-1 indicate the number of sampling scan periods.
The setup for the pulse conversion factor can be executed on the Function Block Detail Builder.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-369
Block
status
NR
Reset
command
PALM
NR
PALM
CTUP
Reset
command
1-370
PV : Count value
The pre-alarm (PALM) status and count-up completed (CTUP) status are mutually exclusive.
When DV=0, the pre-alarm (PALM) status is canceled and changes to count-up completed
(CTUP).
When the setting is DL=0, the status will never become pre-alarm (PALM).
The setting of PH and DL can be changed during operation as set parameters.
The count value continues to be updated even after the count-up completed (CTUP) status is
obtained. When the count value exceeds 8 digits, PV changes to 0 and the block status returns to normal (NR) before counting is continued.
n Pause Operation
A pause command is issued by setting the hold command switch (data item: HSW) to 1 from
operation and monitoring functions or via other function blocks such as a sequence control
block or calculation block. When a pause command is received, the counter action stops temporarily. The counter value and other data are held during the pause. The current block status
of normal (NR), pre-alarm (PAL) or count-up completed is held, while a new pause (PAUS)
status is added. The block status display on the operation and monitoring functions shows only the pause (PAUS) status that has a higher priority.
When a counter reset command is received in a pause (PAUS) state, the count value is reset
to 0 and the currently held block status (NR, PALM or CTUP) is changed to NR.
The figure below shows an example of pause/restart actions of the pulse-count block:
PH
DL
DV
PV
NR
Block status
PALM
CTUP
PAUS
Operation command
Pause
command
Pause
canceled
NR
PAUS
Pause
command
Reset
command
Pause
canceled
n Restart Operation
The pause command is canceled by setting 0 for the hold command switch (data item: HSW).
When the pause command is canceled, the count action currently in pause (PAUS) is resumed. The pause (PAUS) status is removed from the block status, and the original status
that has been saved is recovered. Updating of the count value resumes from the value that
has been held.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-371
Description of manipulation
PAUS
Not valid
Block mode
BSTS
Range
Default (*2)
O/S (MAN)
Block status
-----
NR
ALRM
Alarm status
-----
NR
AFLS
-----
AF
-----
AOFS
-----
PV
Count value
-----
SL
PH
Presetpoint
-----
SH
DV
-----
-----
DL
Pre-alarm setpoint
-----
PL
PV initial value
RST
0, 1
HSW
0, 1
SH
-----
SL
-----
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
-----
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
-----
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the PTC block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-372
Level
2
1
Symbol
Name
Description
PAUS
Pause
CTP
Count Up
PALM
Pre-Alarm
NR
Normal
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-373
1.33
n YS Block Functions
The YS block offers the following functions:
Similar to the faceplate block, the YS block has no special control algorithm. This function
block simply sends and receives data to/from the YS instruments connected to it.
The YS block is used to operate and monitor YS instruments from the HIS, or to control them
from an FCS or supervisory computer.
Corresponding
YS80 Instrument
SLCD
SLCD
SLPC
SLPC
SLMC
SLMC
SMST-111
Corresponding YS
BCS Instrument
Corresponding YS Instrument
Connected via SIConnected to
CU
ALR121
YS150,
YS170 User-selectable multifunction
mode
YS170, YS150
SMST-111
YS135
YS135
SMST-121
SMST-121
YS136
YS136
SMRT
SMRT
SBSD
SBSD
SLBC
SLBC
SLCC
SLCC
STLD
STLD
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-374
1.33.1
Applying YS Blocks
The YS block is a function block operating on the FCS. YS instruments can be operated and
monitored from the HIS via the YS block on the FCS.
FCS
YS instrument
OUT
PID
SET
IN
YS block
IMPORTANT
The YS block and YS instruments are connected via the ALR121/ACM12 on the FFCS series/
KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS. In such cases, do not use the YS block in ROUT
mode or RCAS mode since high-speed communications cannot be achieved. If the YS block
and YS instruments are connected via the LCS in the migrated FCS (RFCS5, RFCS2), to use
the YS block in ROUT mode and send a manipulated output value from a controller block
(such as PID) to a YS instrument via the YS block, select execute YS block before controller
block.
SEE
ALSO
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-375
1.33.2
The YS block provides the following common specification of function block models.
Input Processing
Fully-open/Tightly-shut
Alarm Processing
Others
Processing Timing
This function synchronizes the YS block mode and the operation mode of the YS instrument.
It notifies the YS instruments of a change made from the HIS or Sequence Control functions
to the YS block mode as an operation change. This function also detects changes in the operation mode of the YS instruments and changes the YS block mode accordingly.
This function synchronizes process data and various control parameters between the YS
block and YS instruments.
Input Processing
Among process data of the YS block, PVs are processed via the standard input signal processing function.
Fully-Open/Tightly-Shut
When the YS block is in either MAN or ROUT mode and attempts to set an MV to the YS
instruments, the Fully-open or Tightly-shut function will be executed according to the setting
corresponding to that particular value. When the Fully-open/Tightly-shut function is executed,
the manipulated value of the YS instrument will be -6.3 % or +106.3 %.
Alarm Processing
The YS block references the alarm function of the YS block and sends a message as a
process alarm.
The YS block independently checks an alarm and sends a message as a process alarm.
1-376
Analog CAS
Acquires an SV from the analog cascade setting input terminal of the YS instrument.
Communication CAS
Sets an SV from the FCS (when the SPC/DDC flag of the YS instrument is SPC), or sets
an MV from the FCS (when the SPC/DDC flag of the YS instrument is DDC).
The setting made on the YS instrument determines whether Analog CAS or Communication
CAS is used.
The block mode change operation will differ between Analog CAS and Communication CAS.
IMPORTANT
In Communication CAS, do not use the YS block in RCAS or ROUT mode for the FFCS series/KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS that communicate with YS instruments via the
ALR121/ACM12, since high-speed communications cannot be achieved. The YS block can
be used in CAS mode.
IN
YS block
CIN
IN
IN
MV
MV
When using the YS instrument in Analog CAS, the mode changes will be as shown below.
Circles
Upper row: YS Block Mode
Lower row: YS Instrument Operation Mode
CAS
CAS
Arrows
C: Mode change to CAS on DCS or YS
A: Mode change to AUT on DCS or YS
M: Mode change to MAN on DCS or YS
A
AUT
AUT
MAN
MAN
1-377
In Analog CAS, the YS instruments mode changes are handled in the same way as the YS
blocks mode changes made from the HIS or sequence table. When in MAN mode, neither YS
block mode nor YS instruments operation mode can be switched to CAS mode.
In Analog CAS, the cascade setting input value on the YS instrument will be used as an SV in
CAS mode. The YS block matches its SV value to the SV value on the YS instrument side. If
the SET terminal of the YS block is connected, the IMAN status of the master loop will not be
changed even when the mode is switched to CAS. In RCAS or ROUT mode, no controls can
be performed from the supervisory computer.
PID
SET
YS block
IN
PV
MV
Figure 1.33.2-3 Connection when Using the Set Terminal in Communication CAS
When using the SET terminal in Communication CAS, the mode changes will be as shown
below.
******
BUAorBUM
FCS
Fail
FCS
Recover
Circles
Upper row: YS Block Mode
Lower row: YS Instrument Operation Mode
BU: AUT or MAN
CAS
SPC
Arrows
C: Mode change to CAS on either DCS or YS
A: Mode change to AUT on either DCS or YS
M: Mode change to MAN on either DCS or YS
M
A
C
AUT
AUT
A
M
MAN
MAN
Figure 1.33.2-4 Mode Changes when Using the SET Terminal in Communication CAS
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-378
When mode is changed from AUT to CAS, the YS block will enter CAS mode and the YS instrument will enter SPC mode.
When changing from MAN mode to CAS mode, it is necessary to change from MAN to AUT
first, then to CAS.
A YS instrument will enter the backup mode when the FCS fails while its YS block is in CAS
mode. A setting on the YS instrument can be set to determine whether the backup mode will
be MAN or AUT.
Mode Changes when the SET Terminal is not Used in Communication CAS
IMPORTANT
Do not use the FFCS series/KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS, which communicate
with YS instruments via the ALR121/ACM12, by setting the YS instrument to Communication
CAS but without using the SET terminal of the YS block.
If the SET terminal is not used in Communication CAS, the YS block will not enter CAS mode.
Any attempt on the YS instrument to set the mode to CAS will switch the mode to RCAS or
ROUT.
To control the YS instruments through DDC via PID block and use them as a backup of the
FCS, connect the PID and YS block as shown below. The PID output is enabled when the YS
block is in ROUT mode. In other modes, the PID enters IMAN mode and tracks the MV of the
YS block.
IN
FCS
OUT
PID
YS block
PV
PV
RMV
MV
Figure 1.33.2-5 Connection Example when the SET Terminal is not Used in Communication CAS
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-379
******
BUAorBUM
FCS
Recover
******
BUAorBUM
FCS
Fail
FCS
Recover
RCAS
SPC
FCS
Fail
ROUT
DDC
Circles
Upper row: YS Block Mode
Lower row: YS Instrument Operation Mode
Arrows
C: Mode change to CAS
A: Mode change to AUT
M: Mode change to MAN
RCAS: Mode change to RCAS
ROUT: Mode change to ROUT
: Mode change on the DCS
: Mode change on the YS instrument
Other symbols indicate mode changes
from one or the other.
A
C
AUT
AUT
RCAS
ROUT
A
M
MAN
MAN
Figure 1.33.2-6 Mode Changes when the SET Terminal is not Used in Communication CAS
During MAN mode, if an attempt is made on the YS instrument to change the mode to CAS,
that operation will be disabled if the SPC/DDC flag of the YS Instrument Internal Status is
SPC. If the SPC/DDC flag is DDC, the YS instrument enters DDC mode, and the YS block
enters ROUT mode. The SPC/DDC flag status is determined by the previous remote mode.
Only AUT mode can be changed to RCAS mode, while only MAN mode can be changed to
ROUT mode.
IMPORTANT
In Communication CAS, do not use the YS block in RCAS or ROUT mode for the FFCS series/KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS/PFCS that communicate with YS instruments via the
ALR121/ACM12, since high-speed communications cannot be achieved. The YS block can
be used in CAS mode.
The figure below shows the mode changes of the SMST-111 and SMST-121 blocks.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-380
Analog CAS
CAS
CAS
CAS
DDC
MAN
MAN
M
******
BUM
FCS
Recover
Communication CAS
CAS
CAS
MAN
MAN
ROUT
DDC
C
C
RCAS
SMST-111
SMST-121
RCAS
DDC
FCS
Recover
FCS
Recover
MAN
MAN
Analog CAS
FCS
Fail
FCS
Fail
C
M
ROUT
MAN
MAN
MAN
MAN
FCS
Fail
Circles
Upper row: YS Block Mode
Lower row: YS Instrument Operation Mode
Arrows
C: Mode change to CAS
A: Mode change to AUT
M: Mode change to MAN
RCAS: Mode change to RCAS
ROUT: Mode change to ROUT
: Mode change on the DCS
: Mode change on the YS instrument
Other symbols indicate mode changes
from one or the other.
When Analog CAS is applied in the SMST-111 block, the mode will either be MAN or CAS.
When Communication CAS is connected to set terminal of SMST-111 block, the mode will be
MAN, CAS, otherwise the mode will be RCAS. (When the mode is CAS or RCAS, the YS instrument will perform DDC operation.)
If Analog CAS is applied in the SMST-121 block, the mode will either be MAN or CAS. While,
if communication CAS is applied in the SMST-121 block, the mode will be either MAN or
ROUT.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-381
If communication between the YS instrument and FCS is interrupted during the CAS operation (Communication CAS), the YS instrument enters the backup mode automatically. If the
YS instrument is still in the backup mode after communication has resumed, the YS block issues a command to the YS instrument to cancel the backup mode.
Only tracks YS instrument data but cannot be changed from the YS block side
Example: PV
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set batch setpoints (BSET) to the SBSD and SLBC from the HIS prior to a batch
start. Changing a BSET after a batch start may result in an immediate batch end.
n Input Processing
The YS block can perform the following Common Input Processing.
Digital Filter and Calibration functions are not available.
There are two options for YS block input signal conversions: non-conversion and square root
conversion. Square root conversion can be selected when the connected YS instrument uses
the square-law scale. The YS blocks other than SLCD have only one option that is non-conversion.
An YS block can have its own PV input open high limit and low limit for IOP+/IOP- detection.
When a PV is greater than the value for IOP+ detection limit, the data will be in IOP+ status,
vice versa, when the PV is smaller than the IOP- detection limit, the data will be in IOP- status. IOP detection value can be specified on Function Block Detail Builder.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-382
Totalizer
In the YS80 Block (SLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT), the PVs are totalized and the SUM is created.
The YS BCS Block (SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD) displays the YS instrument SUM without any
changes. To display the correct totalized value, set the SH and SL according to the decimal
places on the YS instruments.
IMPORTANT
The decimal point positions of PV and SUM can be set independently of the YS instruments.
On the other hand, the YS BCS block sets the same decimal point positions for SUM and PV.
Therefore, when the decimal point positions are different between PV and SUM on the YS instrument, the decimal point position of SUM displayed on the YS BCS block differs from that
of the YS instrument.
PV Overshoot
PV is set to an SH value when the IOP+ is detected via the Alarm Processing function. PV is
also set to an SL value when IOP- is detected or when there is an error in communication with
the YS instruments.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-383
YS instrument is less than 0 %, the YS block will take it as a 0 % value, while if the MV in the
YS instrument is greater than 100 %, the YS block will take it as a 100 % value.
n Alarm Processing
Leak Check, Pre-Batch Alarm, Batch End Alarm, Integral Deviation Alarm Level-One, Integral Deviation Alarm Level-Two
The YS block handles alarms generated on the YS block and some alarms generated on the
YS instruments.
Pre-Batch Alarm :
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-384
All YS blocks will generate both an OOP and IOP in the event of an error in communication
with the YS instrument. Thus, the OOP and IOP each contains two meanings, one being the
alarm detected by the YS instruments mentioned previously.
An invalid terminal definition will cause all YS blocks to generate a CNF. Causes of invalid
definitions include when the terminal is not connected to the applicable YS instrument model
and when it is not connected via an ACM12 or an LCS.
SEE
ALSO
n Others
The YS block has the following functions according to the standard PID blocks.
Setpoint Push-Back
This function equalizes SV, CSV, and RSV according to the mode of the function block.
Table 1.33.2-1 Block Modes and Equalization
Block Mode
Equalization Operation
SV CSV, RSV
RCAS
Setpoint Limiter
This function regulates data set to the RSV from the supervisory computer within the setpoint
high and low limits while in RCAS mode (SPC mode).
SEE
ALSO
For more information about Setpoint Push-back and Setpoint Limiter, refer to:
n Processing Timing
The only processing timing available for the YS blocks is a periodic startup. Moreover, only
the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic startup. It is
not possible to specify the medium-speed scan period (*1) or the high-speed scan period.
*1:
The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.34
1-385
By connecting the SLCD block to the SLCD Indicating Controller, the SLCD Indicating Controller can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
The connection of the SLCD block and the SLCD Indicating Controller allows the HIS to operate and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLCD block.
SET
INT
CAS
CSV
RCAS
RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SLCD
IN
PV
MV
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLCD
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.34-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Controller Block
(SLCD)
I/O Terminal
*1:
*2:
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Function
Process I/O
Soft I/O
ence
ting
Connection
Block
IN
YS Instrument
x (*2)
SET
Set Value
Input
INT
Interlock
Switch Input
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
1-386
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the SLCD block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint pushback function, refer to:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint limiter function, refer to:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
MODE
Block mode
xx
O/S (MAN)
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-387
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Process variable
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint
xx
SL
CSV
Cascade setpoint
SL
RSV
Remote setpoint
SL
DV
MV
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
RMV
0.0 to 100.0 %
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
DL
(SH-SL)
MH
xx (*2)
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
ML
xx (*2)
0.0 to 100.0 %
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
xx (*2)
6.3 to 999.9 %
100
Integral time
xx (*2)
1 to 9999 sec
20
Derivative time
xx (*2)
0 to 9999 sec
OPHI
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
OPLO
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
MSH
Fixed to 100 %
100 %
MSL
Fixed to 0 %
0%
RAW
*1:
*2:
*3:
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-388
For more information about valid block modes of the SLCD block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-389
1.35
By connecting the SLPC block to the SLPC programmable indicating controller, the SLPC
programmable indicating controller can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
The connection of the SLPC block and the SLPC programmable indicating controller allows
the HIS to operate and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLPC block.
SET
INT
CAS
CSV
RCAS
RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SLPC
IN
PV
MV
Figure 1.35-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Programmable Controller Block (SLPC)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLPC
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.35-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Programmable
Controller Block (SLPC)
I/O Terminal
*1:
*2:
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
IN
YS Instrument
x (*2)
SET
Set Value
Input
INT
Interlock
Switch Input
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
1-390
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the SLPC block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint pushback function, refer to:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint limiter function, refer to:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
Data Name
Block mode
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
xx
Range
-
Default
O/S (MAN)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-391
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Process variable
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint
xx
SL
CSV
Cascade setpoint
SL
RSV
Remote setpoint
SL
DV
MV
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
RMV
0.0 to 100.0 %
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
DL
(SH-SL)
MH
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
ML
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
xx (*2)
6.3 to 999.9 %
100
Integral time
xx
1 to 9999 sec
20
Derivative time
xx
0 to 9999 sec
BS (*3)
Computation parameter 1
xx
-8.000 to 8.000
0.0
CS (*3)
Computation parameter 2
xx
-8.000 to 8.000
1.000
AUX1 (*3)
Auxiliary input 1
0.0 to 100.0 %
AUX2 (*3)
Auxiliary input 2
0.0 to 100.0 %
AUX3 (*3)
Auxiliary input 3
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPHI
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
OPLO
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
MSH
Fixed to 100 %
100 %
MSL
Fixed to 0 %
0%
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-392
*2:
*3:
*4:
SEE
ALSO
Data Name
Raw input data
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
-
Range
4096 to 20480 (*4)
Default
-
For more information about valid block modes of the SLPC block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.36
1-393
By connecting the SLMC block to the SLMC Programmable Indicating Controller with Pulse
Width Output, the SLMC Programmable Indicating Controller with Pulse Width Output can be
operated and monitored from the HIS.
The connection of the SLMC block and the SLMC Programmable Indicating Controller Block
with Pulse Width Output allows the HIS to operate and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLMC block.
SET
INT
CAS
CSV
RCAS
RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SLMC
IN
PV
MV
Figure 1.36-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLMC
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.36-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Programmable
Controller Block with Pulse Width Output (SLMC)
I/O Terminal
*1:
*2:
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
IN
YS Instrument
x (*2)
SET
Set Value
Input
INT
Interlock
Switch Input
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-394
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the SLMC block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint pushback function, refer to:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint limiter function, refer to:
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-395
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
MODE
Block mode
xx
O/S (MAN)
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Process variable
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint
xx
SL
CSV
Cascade setpoint
SL
RSV
Remote setpoint
SL
DV
MV
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
RMV
0.0 to 100.0 %
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
DL
(SH-SL)
MH
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
ML
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
Proportional band
xx (*2)
6.3 to 999.9 %
100
Integral time
xx
1 to 9999 sec
20
BS (*3)
Computation parameter 1
xx
-8.000 to 8.000
0.0
CS (*3)
Computation parameter 2
xx
-8.000 to 8.000
1.000
AUX1 (*3)
Auxiliary input 1
0.0 to 100.0 %
AUX2 (*3)
Auxiliary input 2
0.0 to 100.0 %
AUX3 (*3)
Auxiliary input 3
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPHI
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
OPLO
0.0 to 100.0 %
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-396
Range
Default
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
MSH
Fixed to 100 %
100 %
MSL
Fixed to 0 %
0%
RAW
*2:
*3:
*4:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
OPMK
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the SLMC block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.37
1-397
By connecting the SMST-111 block to the SMST-111 AUTO/MANUAL Station for SV Setting,
the SMST-111 AUTO/MANUAL Station for SV Setting can be operated and monitored from
the HIS.
The connection of the SMST-111 block and the SMST-111 AUTO/MANUAL Station for SV
Setting allows the HIS to operate and monitor the station.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SMST-111 block.
SET
INT
CAS
CSV
RCAS
RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SMST-111
IN
PV
Figure 1.37-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Manual Station Block with SV Output (SMST-111)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of the
SMST-111 block I/O terminals.
Table 1.37-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Manual Station
Block with SV Output (SMST-111)
I/O Terminal
*1:
*2:
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
IN
YS Instrument
x (*2)
SET
Set Value
Input
INT
Interlock
Switch Input
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-398
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing and alarm processing possible for the SMST-111
block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint pushback function, refer to:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint limiter function, refer to:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-399
Range
Default
Block mode
xx
O/S (MAN)
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Process variable
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Setpoint
xx
SL
CSV
Cascade setpoint
SL
RSV
Remote setpoint
SL
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
SVH
SL to SH
SH
SVL
SL to SH
SL
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
RAW
*2:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MODE
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the SMST-111 block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-400
1.38
By connecting the SMST-121 block to the SMST-121 AUTO/MANUAL Station for MV Setting,
the SMST-121 AUTO/MANUAL Station for MV Setting can be operated and monitored from
the HIS.
The connection of the SMST-121 block and the SMST-121 AUTO/MANUAL Station for MV
Setting allows the HIS to operate and monitor the station.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SMST-121 block.
INT
SMST-121
IN
PV
MV
Figure 1.38-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever
(SMST-121)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of the
SMST-121 block I/O terminals.
Table 1.38-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Manual Station
Block with MV Output Lever (SMST-121)
I/O Terminal
*1:
*2:
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
IN
YS Instrument
x (*2)
INT
Interlock
Switch Input
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-401
The only processing timing available for the SMST-121 block is a periodic startup. Moreover,
only the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic startup.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the SMST-121 block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
Data Name
Entry Permitted or
Not(*1)
Range
Default
MODE
Block mode
xx
O/S (MAN)
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
Alarm detection
specification
AOFS
Alarm masking
specification
PV
Process variable
PV engineering unit
SL
value
SUM
Totalizer value
Engineering unit
value
MV
Manipulated output
value
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
RMV
0.0 to 100.0 %
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-402
Entry Permitted or
Not(*1)
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
MH
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
ML
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPHI
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
OPLO
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
MSH
Fixed to 100 %
100 %
MSL
Fixed to 0 %
0%
RAW
Data Item
*1:
*2:
SEE
ALSO
Range
Default
For more information about valid block modes of the SMST-121 block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.39
1-403
By connecting the SMRT block to the Ratio Set Station (SMRT), the SMRT Ratio Set Station
can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
The connection of the SMRT block and the SMRT Ratio Set Station allows the HIS to operate
and monitor the station.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SMRT block.
SET
INT
CAS
CSV
RCAS
RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SMRT
IN
PV
MV
Figure 1.39-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Ratio Set Station Block (SMRT)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SMRT
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.39-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Ratio Set Station
Block (SMRT)
I/O Terminal
*1:
*2:
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
IN
YS Instrument
x (*2)
SET
Set Value
Input
INT
Interlock
Switch Input
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
1-404
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the SMRT block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint pushback function, refer to:
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the setpoint limiter function, refer to:
SMRT Ratio Set Instrument converts the ratio setpoint value (SV), based on the engineering
unit, into an internal ratio value (SVn) for internal computation.
The communication between the SMRT Ratio Set Instrument and the SMRT function block
only conveys the internal ratio value (SVn), the setpoint value based on the engineering unit
(SV) is not conveyed.
In order to make the setpoint value (SV) on the SMRT function block equal to the setpoint value (SV) on SMRT Ratio Set Instrument, when the SMRT function block receives or sends the
internal ratio value, the conversion based on the scale settings is performed with the following
formulae:
When SMRT function block converts the received internal ratio svn into its SV:
IM 33K03E22-50E
SV =
svn svnLo
svnHi svnLo
1-405
When SMRT function block sends it SV to SMRT Ratio Set Instrument, it converts the SV into
the internal ratio svn:
svn =
SV SSL
SSH SSL
SV
svn
: Internal ratio value communicated between the SMRT Ratio Set Instrument and the
SMRT function block
: Upper limit of SV
SVL
: Lower limit of SV
If both the upper limit and lower limit of the internal ratio value are set with 0.0, the scale conversion cannot be performed. Under this circumstance, the internal ratio value in SMRT Ratio
Set Instrument will become the setpoint value of SMRT function block.
The ranges of the SMRT function block ratio setpoint value (SV) and the internal ratio value
(svn) can be defined on the function block details builder.
The upper limit of (SSH) and the lower limit (SSL) of the SMRT function block SV range
should be the same as the upper limit of (SEH) and the lower limit (SEL) of SMRT Ratio Set
Instrument SV range respectively. The upper limit (svnHi) and the lower limit (svnLo) of the
SMRT function block svn range should be the same as the upper limit of the range (SRH) and
the lower limit (SRL) of SMRT Ratio Set Instrument SVn range respectively.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-406
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
MODE
Block mode
xx
O/S (MAN)
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Process variable
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV (*2)
Ratio setpoint
xx
SSL to SSH
SL
CSV
SSL to SSH
SL
RSV
SSL to SSH
SL
MV
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
RMV
0.0 to 100.0 %
PH
SL to SH
SH
PL
SL to SH
SL
DL
Lamp constant
xx
(SSH-SSL)
100.0
MH
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
ML
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
SVH
SSL to SSH
SSH
SVL
SSL to SSH
SSL
EB
External bias
0.0 to 100.0 %
P1
Computation parameter 1
xx
-800.0 to 800.0
P2
Computation parameter 2
xx
-800.0 to 800.0
P3
Computation parameter 3
xx
-800.0 to 800.0
P4
Computation parameter 4
xx
-800.0 to 800.0
CALC
Computed value
0.0 to 100.0 %
0.0 %
OPHI
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
OPLO
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
SSH (*3)
Fixed to 8.000
8.000
SSL (*3)
Fixed to 0.000
0.000
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-407
Range
Default
Fixed to 100 %
100 %
MSL
Fixed to 0 %
0%
RAW
*2:
*3:
*4:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
MSH
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the SMRT block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-408
1.40
By connecting the SBSD block to the Batch Set Station (SBSD), the SBSD Batch Set Station
can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
The connection of the SBSD block and the SBSD Batch Set Station allows the HIS to operate
and monitor the station.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SBSD block.
RCAS
RSV
AUT
SV
SBSD
IN
PV
MV
Figure 1.40-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD)
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set batch setpoints (BSET) to the YS Batch Set Station Block (SBSD) from the HIS
prior to a batch start. Changing a BSET after a batch start may result in an immediate batch
end.
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SBSD
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.40-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Batch Set Station
Block (SBSD)
I/O Terminal
IN
*1:
*2:
YS Instrument
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
x
x (*2)
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-409
The only processing timing available for the SBSD block is a periodic startup. Moreover, only
the basic scan period can be selected as the scan period to execute the periodic startup.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing and alarm processing possible for the SBSD block,
refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
MODE
Block mode
xx
O/S (AUT)
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Instantaneous flow
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Command switch
xx
0 to 8
RSV
0 to 8
MV
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
PH
xx
SL to SH
SH
PL
xx
SL to SH
SL
VL
xx
SL to SH
SL
BSET
Batch setpoint
xx
CC1
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC2
First-order compensation
coefficient b (*3) (*2)
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC3
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC4
Density r (*4)
xx
0.5000 to 1.2000
1.0000
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-410
Range
Default
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
OPLO
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
MSH
Fixed to 100 %
100 %
MSL
Fixed to 0 %
0%
RAW
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
OPHI
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the SBSD block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.41
1-411
By connecting the SLBC block to the Batch Controller (SLBC), the SLBC Batch Controller can
be operated and monitored from the HIS.
The connection of the SLBC block and the SLBC Batch Controller allows the HIS to operate
and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLBC block.
INT
RCAS
RSV
AUT/MAN
SV
SLBC
IN
PV
MV
Figure 1.41-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Batch Controller Block (SLBC)
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set batch setpoints (BSET) to the SLBC from the HIS prior to a batch start. Changing a BSET after a batch start may result in an immediate batch end.
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLBC
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.41-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Batch Controller
Block (SLBC)
I/O Terminal
*1:
*2:
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
IN
YS Instrument
x (*2)
INT
Interlock
Switch Input
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-412
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the SLBC block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
MODE
Block mode
xx
O/S (MAN)
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Instantaneous flow
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Command switch
xx
0 to 8
RSV
0 to 8
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-413
RMV
PH
PL
Range
Default
0.0 to 100.0 %
0.0 to 100.0 %
xx
SL to SH
SH
xx
SL to SH
SL
VL
xx
SL to SH
SL
BSET
Batch setpoint
xx
CC1
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC2
First-order compensation
coefficient (*3) (*2)
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC3
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC4
Density (*4)
xx
0.5000 to 1.2000
1.0000
OPHI
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
OPLO
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
MSH
Fixed to 100 %
100 %
MSL
Fixed to 0 %
0%
RAW
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
ALSO
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
xx
*1:
SEE
Data Name
For more information about valid block modes of the SLBC block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-414
1.42
By connecting the SLCC block to the SLCC Blending Controller, the SLCC Blending Controller can be operated and monitored from the HIS.
The connection of the SLCC block and SLCC Blending Controller allows the HIS to operate
and monitor the controller.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the SLCC block.
INT
RCAS
RSV
AUT
SV
SLCC
IN
PV
MV
Figure 1.42-1 Function Block Diagram of the YS Blending Controller Block (SLCC)
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of SLCC
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.42-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Blending Controller
Block (SLCC)
I/O Terminal
*1:
*2:
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
IN
YS Instrument
x (*2)
INT
Interlock
Switch Input
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-415
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
for the SLCC block, refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4, Output Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
This function locks the YS block mode to MAN depending on the connection destination of the
YS blocks INT terminal.
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the mode change interlock function, refer to:
lFixing to MAN Mode using the Mode Change Interlock Function on page 1-380
This sets the SV Range Display Format so the decimal point of the ratio setting value (SV) of
the SLCC block will match that of the SLCC Blending Controller Block.
The SV Range Display Format is setting using the Function Block Detail Builder.
Data Name
Block mode
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
xx
Range
-
Default
O/S (MAN)
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-416
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Instantaneous flow
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
SV
Ratio setpoint
xx
SSL to SSH
RSV
SSL to SSH
MV
xx
0.0 to 100.0 %
RMV
0.0 to 100.0 %
DV
CC1
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC2
First-order compensation
coefficient (*2) (*3)
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC3
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC4
Density (*4)
xx
0.5000 to 1.2000
1.0000
OPHI
0.0 to 100.0 %
100
OPLO
0.0 to 100.0 %
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
SSH
100.00 %
SSL
0.000
MSH
Fixed to 100 %
100 %
MSL
Fixed to 0 %
0%
RAW
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-417
For more information about valid block modes of the SLCC block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
1.43
1-418
By connecting the STLD block to the Totalizer (STLD), the STLD Totalizer can be operated
and monitored from the HIS.
The connection of the STLD block and the STLD Totalizer allows the HIS to operate and monitor the totalizer.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of the STLD block.
STLD
IN
PV
The table below shows the connection methods and the connection destinations of STLD
block I/O terminals.
Table 1.43-1 I/O Terminal Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of YS Totalizer Block
(STLD)
I/O Terminal
IN
*1:
*2:
YS Instrument
Connection Method(*1)
Connection Destination(*1)
Data Refer- Data SetTerminal
Software
Function
Process I/O
ence
ting
Connection
I/O
Block
x
x (*2)
x: Connection is possible
-: Connection is not possible
: Connection is possible only when integrating with a Switch Block (SW-33, SW-91) or Inter-Station Connection Block (ADL)
Connection is possible only when integrating with YS instruments
IM 33K03E22-50E
1-419
SEE
ALSO
For more information about the common functions of the YS blocks, refer to:
1.33, Control Operations of YS Blocks on page 1-373
For more information about the types of input processing and alarm processing possible for the STLD block,
refer to:
1.1.3, Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-12
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3, Input Processing in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5, Alarm Processing-FCS in the Function Blocks Overview (IM 33K03E21-50E)
Data Name
Entry Permitted
or Not (*1)
Range
Default
MODE
Block mode
xx
O/S (AUT)
ALRM
Alarm status
NR
AFLS
AF
AOFS
PV
Instantaneous flow
SL
SUM
Totalizer value
CC1
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC2
First-order compensation
coefficient (*3) (*2)
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC3
xx
-1.0000 to 1.0000
0.0000
CC4
Density (*4)
xx
0.5000 to 1.2000
1.0000
OPMK
Operation mark
0 to 64
UAID
User application ID
SH
SL
RAW
*1:
*2:
IM 33K03E22-50E
SEE
ALSO
1-420
Valid only when the general secondary expression is selected for the correction computation. Setting a new value for CC2 will
change the CC4 data.
Valid only when the ASTM method is selected for the correction computation. Setting a new value for CC4 will change the
CC2 data.
The range of 4096 (0x1000) to 20480 (0x5000) corresponds to the range of 0.0 % to 100.0 %.
For more information about valid block modes of the STLD block, refer to:
1.1.4, Valid Block Modes for Each Regulatory Control Block on page 1-18
IM 33K03E22-50E
Ind-1
INDEX
Symbols
13-Zone Program Set Block
13-Zone Program Set Block.................... 1-224
Line-Segment Pattern Signal Generation 1-225
Program End Action.................................1-228
Program Set Action..................................1-226
A
Alarm Block.........................................................1-6
ALM-R.............................................................1-360
AS-H/M/L........................................................ 1-307
AUT Fallback.................................................... 1-44
Auto-Selector Blocks.......................................1-307
B
Basic Type PID Control.....................................1-54
Blending PI Controller Block
Blending PI Controller Block ................... 1-106
Bumpless Switching ................................1-110
Control Error Alarm ................................. 1-112
Cumulative Deviation Alarm .................... 1-111
PI Control Based on Cumulative Deviation ......
..........................................................1-108
Block Mode Change Interlock........................... 1-46
BSETU-2.........................................................1-265
BSETU-3.........................................................1-275
Bumpless Switching..........................................1-41
C
Cascade Signal Distributor Block....................1-321
Computer Fail................................................... 1-45
Control Action Bypass.......................................1-56
Control Action Direction.................................... 1-31
Control Computation Processing...................... 1-26
Control Hold...................................................... 1-43
Control Output Action........................................1-30
Control Signal Splitter Block
Control Action Direction........................... 1-353
Control Output Action.............................. 1-353
D
Deadband Action.............................................. 1-35
Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block
Deviation Alarm....................................... 1-318
Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block....1-316
Signal Selection....................................... 1-317
E
Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
...................................................................1-83
Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block .
...................................................................1-76
F
Feedforward Signal Summing Block...............1-327
FFSUM............................................................1-327
Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block
Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block...............1-265
Flowrate Alarm.........................................1-270
Missing Pulse Alarm................................ 1-268
FOUT.............................................................. 1-321
G
Gap Action........................................................ 1-28
I
I-PD...................................................................1-54
Initialization Manual.......................................... 1-42
Input Compensation..........................................1-36
Input Indicator Block......................................... 1-20
Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm
Deviation Alarm......................................... 1-24
Input Indicator Block with Deviation Alarm 1-23
Setpoint Value Limiter................................1-24
Input Indicator Blocks..........................................1-4
IM 33K03E22-50E
Ind-2
Input or Output Compensation..........................1-36
M
MAN Fallback....................................................1-44
Manual Loader Block ..................................... 1-154
Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW
Automatic Control Output Computation .. 1-161
Block Mode Change Interlock .................1-166
Bumpless Switching ................................1-162
Control Output Action ............................. 1-162
Initialization Manual................................. 1-165
MAN Fallback ......................................... 1-166
Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW .........
..........................................................1-159
Setpoint Value Pushback ........................1-162
Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator ...... 1-156
Manual Loader Blocks........................................ 1-5
MC-2 .............................................................. 1-169
MC-2E ............................................................1-169
MC-3 .............................................................. 1-169
MC-3E ............................................................1-169
Measurement Tracking..................................... 1-38
MLD ............................................................... 1-154
MLD-PVI......................................................... 1-156
MLD-SW ........................................................ 1-159
Motor Control Blocks
2-Position Pulsive Output ....................... 1-195
2-Position Status Output .........................1-193
3-Position Pulsive Output ....................... 1-195
3-Position Status Output .........................1-194
Answer Back Error Alarm ....................... 1-209
Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm ......... 1-209
Answerback Check ................................. 1-181
Answerback Input Signal ........................ 1-177
Answerback Tracking ..............................1-201
Block Mode Change Interlock .................1-186
Bypass Command Switch .......................1-189
Computer Fail ......................................... 1-185
Fallback .................................................. 1-201
Feedback Input High Limit/Low Limit Alarm .....
..........................................................1-207
Feedback Input Signal ............................ 1-177
Inching Output ........................................ 1-196
Initialization Manual ................................ 1-183
Input Signal Conversion of Answerback Input .
..........................................................1-178
Input Signal Conversion of Feedback Input .....
..........................................................1-177
Interlock Alarm ........................................1-208
Interlock Check ....................................... 1-203
MAN Fallback ......................................... 1-184
N
Non-Interference Control Output Block...........1-340
Non-Linear Gain................................................1-27
O
ONOFF ............................................................ 1-76
ONOFF-E .........................................................1-76
ONOFF-G ........................................................ 1-83
ONOFF-GE ...................................................... 1-83
Output Compensation....................................... 1-37
P
PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
Bumpless Switching ................................1-103
PD Control with Manual Reset ................1-101
PD Controller Block with Manual Reset ....1-99
PD-MR.............................................................. 1-99
PG-L13............................................................1-224
PI-BLEND ...................................................... 1-106
PI-D...................................................................1-55
PI-HLD.............................................................. 1-59
PI-HLD Action after Hold...................................1-64
PID.................................................................... 1-49
PID Controller Block..........................................1-49
PID Controller Block with Batch Switch
PID Control Computation with Two-Level Output Switching ..................................... 1-70
PID Controller Block with Batch Switch .... 1-68
PID-BSW...........................................................1-68
PID-STC .........................................................1-116
PID-TP.............................................................. 1-91
PRD.................................................................. 1-47
Primary Direct................................................... 1-47
Process Variable Tracking................................ 1-38
PTC.................................................................1-367
Pulse Count Input Block........................... 1-6,1-367
PV Derivative Type PID Control........................1-55
PV Proportional and Derivative Type PID Control...
...................................................................1-54
IM 33K03E22-50E
Ind-3
PVI.................................................................... 1-20
PVI-DV.............................................................. 1-23
R
RATIO............................................................. 1-210
Ratio Set Block
AUT Fallback .......................................... 1-220
Block Mode Change Interlock .................1-221
Bumpless Switching.................................1-216
Computer Fail.......................................... 1-220
Control Hold.............................................1-219
Control Output Action.............................. 1-215
Initialization Manual................................. 1-218
MAN Fallback.......................................... 1-219
Ratio Computation................................... 1-213
Ratio Set Block........................................ 1-210
Setpoint Value Limiter..............................1-215
Setpoint Value Pushback.........................1-215
Regulatory Control.............................................. 1-1
Regulatory Control Blocks.................................. 1-2
Representative Alarm Block............................1-360
Reset Limit Function......................................... 1-31
S
Sampling PI Controller Block
PI Control Computation with Hold..............1-62
Sampling PI Controller Block..................... 1-59
SBSD.............................................................. 1-408
Self-Tuning PID Controller Block
CR............................................................1-144
DA............................................................1-144
DMAX ..................................................... 1-142
Execution of Auto-Startup .......................1-131
Execution of Initializer Start .................... 1-130
Execution of On-Demand Tuning ........... 1-135
GM........................................................... 1-144
IA............................................................. 1-144
IMAX ....................................................... 1-142
IMIN ........................................................ 1-142
IP............................................................. 1-144
LM............................................................1-144
MI ............................................................1-141
NB ...........................................................1-140
OS ...........................................................1-140
PA............................................................ 1-144
PIDC........................................................ 1-143
PMAX ......................................................1-142
PMIN .......................................................1-142
Self-Tuning Function ...............................1-123
Self-Tuning Operating Modes and Block Status ....................................................1-125
T
Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
ON/OFF Three-Position Control Computation .
............................................................1-86
Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block . 1-83
Three-Position Status Output ................... 1-88
Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block . 1-91
Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Output ................ 1-95
Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Period ................ 1-95
Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)
2-Position ON/OFF Output...................... 1-253
3-Position ON/OFF Output...................... 1-254
Batch End Alarm......................................1-257
Batch Operation (2-Position ON/OFF Output)..
..........................................................1-245
Batch Operation (3-Position ON/OFF Output)..
..........................................................1-246
Batch Operation (Analog Output)............ 1-236
Compatibility between Totalizing Batch Set
Block and CENTUM V, CENTUM-XL Totalizing Batch Set Unit...................... 1-260
Cumulative Deviation High and Low Limit
Alarm................................................ 1-258
Integration................................................1-235
Leak Alarm...............................................1-258
Pre-Batch Alarm...................................... 1-257
IM 33K03E22-50E
Ind-4
Totalizing Batch Set Blocks......................1-234
Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
ON/OFF Two-Position Control Computation ....
............................................................1-79
Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block .... 1-76
Two-Position Status Output....................... 1-80
V
VELLIM........................................................... 1-287
Velocity Limiter Block
Deviation Alarm....................................... 1-297
Velocity Limiter Block...............................1-287
Velocity Limiting Computation..................1-289
W
Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block
Flowrate Alarm.........................................1-284
SUM Conversion......................................1-282
Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block........... 1-275
Weight-Totalizing Conversion.................. 1-281
X
XCPL...............................................................1-340
Y
YS Batch Controller Block...............................1-411
YS Batch Set Station Block.............................1-408
YS Blending Controller Block..........................1-414
YS Blocks................................................. 1-7,1-373
YS Controller Block.........................................1-385
YS Manual Station Block with MV Output Lever......
.................................................................1-400
YS Manual Station Block with SV Output....... 1-397
YS Programmable Controller Block................ 1-389
YS Programmable Controller Block with Pulse
Width........................................................1-393
YS Ratio Set Station Block............................. 1-403
YS Totalizer Block........................................... 1-418
IM 33K03E22-50E
Rev-1
Revision Information
Title
Postface
1.3
1.4
1.4
1.18
1.23
1.28
1.30
Corrected of errors in Table Relationship between the Non-linear Gain Coefficient and
Effective Proportional Gain.
IM 33K03E22-50E
Blank Page